document version a - mettler toledo · user manual document version a pce line manager - plm/plm...
TRANSCRIPT
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16Document Version A
User
Man
ual
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 11/6/2017 9:52AM - Schema ST4 PDF engine - Layout by Victor Mahler
PCE
Line
Man
ager
- PL
M/P
LM d
irect
4.1
6
Inten
tiona
lly le
ft blan
k
2 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Table of Contents
1 Introduction to the Manual 91.1 Scope and Intended Users............................................................................................. 91.2 Service ....................................................................................................................... 91.3 Language ................................................................................................................... 91.4 Formatting and Meaning............................................................................................... 101.5 Visibility of Buttons and Screens .................................................................................... 101.6 How to Use Screenshots ............................................................................................... 10
2 General Information 112.1 Menu Tree................................................................................................................... 112.2 Screen Elements Overview ............................................................................................ 122.3 Starting the PLM .......................................................................................................... 132.4 Logging In and Logging Out.......................................................................................... 132.5 Input Function ............................................................................................................. 15
2.5.1 Remote Control ............................................................................................. 162.5.2 Taking Screenshots ....................................................................................... 16
2.6 Home Screen............................................................................................................... 17
3 Functions Overview 183.1 Scope......................................................................................................................... 183.2 Marking and Capturing of Items..................................................................................... 183.3 Link of Control Devices ................................................................................................. 183.4 Level Definitions .......................................................................................................... 19
4 Administration of Users and Groups 204.1 User Management........................................................................................................ 20
4.1.1 Creating a New User...................................................................................... 214.1.2 Editing a User Account................................................................................... 224.1.3 Adding a User to a Group............................................................................... 234.1.4 Adding or Withdrawing Rights to a User........................................................... 234.1.5 Changing the Password of a User ................................................................... 244.1.6 Deleting a User Account ................................................................................. 24
4.2 Creating and Editing Groups.......................................................................................... 244.2.1 Creating a New Group ................................................................................... 254.2.2 Adding or Withdrawing Rights to a Group ........................................................ 254.2.3 Deleting a Group Account............................................................................... 26
4.3 Active Directory............................................................................................................ 27
5 Preparation for Production 285.1 Overview of Production ................................................................................................ 285.2 Creating and Editing Devices......................................................................................... 28
5.2.1 The System Settings Overview Screen .............................................................. 285.2.2 Editing System Settings.................................................................................. 305.2.3 System Parameters List.................................................................................. 315.2.4 Creating a Device.......................................................................................... 365.2.5 Deleting a Device .......................................................................................... 375.2.6 PLC ............................................................................................................. 375.2.6.1 Import / Export (XML settings file) ............................................................. 395.2.6.2 Parameters............................................................................................. 395.2.6.3 Teach ................................................................................................... 405.2.6.4 PLC Siemens .......................................................................................... 405.2.7 Printers ........................................................................................................ 415.2.7.1 Printer Mode........................................................................................... 415.2.7.2 Wolke m600 advanced/oem .................................................................... 415.2.7.3 Zebra ..................................................................................................... 425.2.7.4 Integration of NiceLabel............................................................................ 435.2.8 Cameras ...................................................................................................... 475.2.8.1 Reader Modes ........................................................................................ 475.2.8.2 Smart Camera ........................................................................................ 51
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 3 / 274
5.2.8.3 Aggregation with Smart Camera ................................................................ 535.2.8.4 Setting up a Product in SMC ..................................................................... 555.2.8.5 High Resolution Camera (PCE_HRC)......................................................... 645.2.8.6 High Resolution Camera LAN (PCE_HRC_LAN)........................................... 655.2.8.7 High Resolution Camera (PCE_HRC_VDMAXML)......................................... 665.2.9 Use cases for Printer/Reader Modes with China Coding ..................................... 675.2.10 Hand Scanner............................................................................................... 695.2.11 Checkweigher ............................................................................................... 715.2.12 UPS............................................................................................................. 725.2.13 Comparator VGL7/VGL8................................................................................. 735.2.14 Garvens X-series weigher............................................................................... 745.2.15 CentralWrapper module ................................................................................. 745.2.16 Palletizer_Extension module........................................................................... 745.2.16.1 Precondition ........................................................................................... 745.2.16.2 Creating the Palletizer_Extension module ................................................... 755.2.16.3 Workflow ............................................................................................... 755.2.17 PCE_REPORTER............................................................................................ 785.2.18 PCE_DECOM_FINALIZER ................................................................................ 795.2.19 PCE_PARTIAL_UNIT module ........................................................................... 815.2.20 PCE_PSM_EXPORTER module ........................................................................ 845.2.21 SystemSettingsExtension module .................................................................... 88
5.3 Configuring IP Addresses ............................................................................................. 885.3.1 Allocating IP Addresses ................................................................................. 885.3.2 Internal Remote Control.................................................................................. 895.3.3 Example of IP Allocation ................................................................................ 895.3.4 COM Interface IPs.......................................................................................... 915.3.5 Entering IP addresses at the Devices .............................................................. 91
5.4 Local Cache Mode ....................................................................................................... 915.5 Central Wrapper........................................................................................................... 92
5.5.1 Concept ....................................................................................................... 925.5.2 Prerequisites................................................................................................. 945.5.3 Device Configuration ..................................................................................... 945.5.3.1 Packaging Line ....................................................................................... 945.5.3.2 Central Wrapper Line ............................................................................... 955.5.4 Working with the Central Wrapper module ....................................................... 965.5.5 Using the SSCC Exporter ................................................................................ 985.5.5.1 Process Requirements ............................................................................. 985.5.5.2 SSCC Exporter Workflow........................................................................... 995.5.5.3 Setting up the SSCC Exporter..................................................................... 995.5.5.4 Working with the SSCC Exporter ................................................................ 1015.5.6 Alarm List..................................................................................................... 103
6 Production 1046.1 Production Settings Screen............................................................................................ 1046.2 Line Format................................................................................................................. 104
6.2.1 Line Format Setup Procedure .......................................................................... 1046.2.2 Add/Edit Line Format Screen .......................................................................... 1056.2.3 Creating a New Line Format ........................................................................... 1056.2.4 Editing Line Formats...................................................................................... 1066.2.5 Use Wildcard Function................................................................................... 1066.2.6 Special Barcode Configuration in the Label....................................................... 1076.2.7 Editing Device Settings at Line Format ............................................................. 1076.2.8 Device Settings at Line Format - PLC ............................................................... 1096.2.9 Device Settings at Line Format - Smart Camera................................................. 1116.2.10 Device Settings at Line Format - High Resolution Camera .................................. 1116.2.11 Device Settings at Line Format - Comparator 7/8 .............................................. 1126.2.12 Device Settings at Line Format - Hand Scanner................................................. 1136.2.13 Device Settings at Line Format - Printer Item Level............................................. 1146.2.14 Device Settings at Line Format - Zebra Case Level ............................................. 1146.2.15 Device Settings at Line Format - SystemSettingsExtension module ...................... 1156.2.16 Line Format Report ........................................................................................ 115
6.3 Product Management ................................................................................................... 115
4 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
6.3.1 Product Management Screen .......................................................................... 1166.3.2 Creating and Deleting a Product...................................................................... 1166.3.3 Adding and Deleting Application IDs at a Product.............................................. 117
6.4 Order Management ...................................................................................................... 1186.4.1 Loading an Order via Hand Scanner ............................................................... 1186.4.2 Adding and Editing Orders ............................................................................. 1186.4.3 Adding a New Order ..................................................................................... 1196.4.4 Editing an Order ........................................................................................... 1196.4.5 Adding Order Details ..................................................................................... 1216.4.6 Deleting an Order ......................................................................................... 1216.4.7 Creating an Order Report................................................................................ 1216.4.8 Resetting the Order Status .............................................................................. 1226.4.9 Move Order to Line ........................................................................................ 1226.4.10 Reopening a Closed Order ............................................................................. 1226.4.11 Reworking an Order....................................................................................... 1236.4.11.1 Preconditions for Reworking an Order ........................................................ 1236.4.11.2 Creating the Rework Module ..................................................................... 1236.4.11.3 Workflow ............................................................................................... 124
6.5 Start/Stop Production.................................................................................................... 1276.5.1 Starting Production via Order .......................................................................... 1276.5.2 Automatic Production Stop ............................................................................. 1296.5.3 Starting Production via Order > Test Run ......................................................... 1296.5.4 Starting Test Run via Line Format .................................................................... 1306.5.5 Production Menu during Production ................................................................ 131
6.6 Serialization ................................................................................................................ 1326.6.1 Internal Handling of Serial Numbers ................................................................ 1326.6.2 Serialization Settings at the PLM ..................................................................... 1326.6.3 Algorithms.................................................................................................... 1336.6.4 Post-Production Serial Number Check ............................................................. 135
6.7 Aggregation................................................................................................................. 1366.7.1 Functional Principle of Aggregation ................................................................. 1366.7.2 Serialization / Aggregation Preconditions ......................................................... 1376.7.3 Serialization with XMV ................................................................................... 1376.7.4 Aggregation Status ........................................................................................ 1376.7.5 Aggregation with ABS ................................................................................... 1396.7.6 Aggregation with SCS ................................................................................... 1406.7.7 Aggregation with MAS ................................................................................... 1416.7.8 Aggregation Examples .................................................................................. 1416.7.8.1 Item - Bundle - Case (by Reading Bundle Labels) - Pallet ........................... 1426.7.8.2 Item - Bundle - Case (by Reading Item Label) - Pallet ................................ 1436.7.8.3 Item - Case - Pallet.................................................................................. 1456.7.8.4 Item - Pallet............................................................................................ 1466.7.9 Manual Aggregation Actions ........................................................................... 1476.7.9.1 Destroying Parent Label (Reversing Aggregation)........................................ 1476.7.9.2 Deleting Parent/Child Relation (deaggregate).............................................. 1476.7.9.3 Suspending an Order ............................................................................... 1476.7.9.4 Finishing an Order Before it is completed .................................................. 1486.7.9.5 Commissioning and Decommissioning a Unit ............................................ 1486.7.9.6 Closing an Incomplete Unit (partial case)................................................... 1486.7.9.7 Viewing Aggregation Rank of a Unit ........................................................... 1486.7.9.8 Re-printing a Label with same SN or Different SN ........................................ 1496.7.9.9 Handling Incomplete Units........................................................................ 1496.7.9.10 Run Testorder with Imported GTIN ............................................................. 1506.7.10 Manual Aggregation by Scanning a Barcode .................................................... 1506.7.10.1 Creating a Barcode Command.................................................................. 1506.7.10.2 List of Commands................................................................................... 1516.7.10.3 Commonly used Barcodes ....................................................................... 154
6.8 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 1546.8.1 Treating Products after an Interruption.............................................................. 1546.8.2 Avoiding Waste of Items after an Interruption ................................................... 1556.8.2.1 Use Wildcards globally for all Line Formats ................................................ 155
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 5 / 274
6.8.2.2 Use Wildcards Line Format Specific .......................................................... 1566.8.3 HRC Offset is too large................................................................................... 1576.8.4 Printer Offset is too Large / Small .................................................................... 1586.8.5 Ejector Offset is too Large / Small ................................................................... 1586.8.6 Scanner Offset is too Large / Small .................................................................. 1586.8.7 “Processing Timeout” at the HRC AI-CORE (SCS) .............................................. 159
6.9 Device Options during Production .................................................................................. 1616.9.1 Smart Camera .............................................................................................. 1626.9.2 Check of Serial Number ................................................................................. 1626.9.3 High Resolution Camera ................................................................................ 1636.9.4 Hand Scanner............................................................................................... 1636.9.4.1 Show Information ................................................................................... 1646.9.4.2 Show Hierarchy ...................................................................................... 1646.9.4.3 Show Aggregation .................................................................................. 1656.9.4.4 Debug Console ....................................................................................... 1656.9.5 Wolke Printer Menu during Production............................................................. 1666.9.5.1 Machine Settings..................................................................................... 1666.9.5.2 Ink Level Settings .................................................................................... 1676.9.5.3 Cleaning Wolke-Cartridges ...................................................................... 1676.9.5.4 Show in Process Control .......................................................................... 1676.9.5.5 Label Preview ......................................................................................... 1686.9.6 Domino Printer Menu..................................................................................... 1686.9.7 Camera Menu during Production..................................................................... 1686.9.8 PLC ............................................................................................................. 170
6.10 Communication with PCE Site Manager .......................................................................... 1706.11 Alarms ....................................................................................................................... 170
7 Quick Reference 1717.1 Installation and Setup................................................................................................... 171
7.1.1 Set up an Order............................................................................................. 1717.1.2 Set up a Product ........................................................................................... 1717.1.3 Installation of a New PLM .............................................................................. 1747.1.3.1 Installing a New PLM and Keep the Previous One ....................................... 174
7.2 Manual Operations....................................................................................................... 1757.2.1 Handle Items at Power Failure or E-Stop .......................................................... 1757.2.2 Reprint a Case or Pallet Label......................................................................... 1757.2.3 Continue Suspended Order ............................................................................. 1757.2.4 Suspend an Order ......................................................................................... 1757.2.5 View Hierarchy.............................................................................................. 1757.2.6 Aggregate an Item to a closed Partial Case ...................................................... 1767.2.7 Aggregate a case to a closed partial pallet ....................................................... 1767.2.8 Aggregate pallet to Shipment .......................................................................... 1767.2.9 Aggregate Item to Case at MAS ....................................................................... 176
8 System Settings 1778.1 Defining Database Connection....................................................................................... 1778.2 Switching between Lines............................................................................................... 177
8.2.1 Changing global System Settings .................................................................... 1778.3 Second Signature Configuration ..................................................................................... 177
8.3.1 Activating Second Signature ........................................................................... 1788.3.2 Second Signature Group ................................................................................ 1788.3.3 Message Configuration Screen........................................................................ 1798.3.4 Action Configuration Screen............................................................................ 1798.3.5 Importing / Exporting the Second Signature XML File ......................................... 179
8.4 Importing ERP Data over XML Configuration.................................................................... 1808.5 E-mail Notification ....................................................................................................... 1818.6 Edit Month Name List ................................................................................................... 1828.7 System Information ...................................................................................................... 184
8.7.1 Extracting System Information......................................................................... 1858.7.2 System Logging ............................................................................................ 185
8.8 Remove / Save Error Images ........................................................................................ 186
6 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
9 Statistics 1879.1 Log File Management ................................................................................................... 1879.2 View Statistics ............................................................................................................. 188
9.2.1 Counters ...................................................................................................... 1899.2.2 Print Quality ................................................................................................. 1899.2.3 Show Error Images........................................................................................ 1909.2.4 Database Statistics ....................................................................................... 1909.2.5 Serial Number Traceability.............................................................................. 1909.2.5.1 Single Serial Number View........................................................................ 1919.2.5.2 Order View ............................................................................................. 1929.2.5.3 Quality Sample ....................................................................................... 192
10 Master Slave Feature 19310.1 Introduction and Scope................................................................................................. 19310.2 PLM Configuration ....................................................................................................... 194
10.2.1 Database Setup ............................................................................................ 19410.2.2 Internal Connection ....................................................................................... 19510.2.3 Line Setup .................................................................................................... 19510.2.4 Device Creation for PLM_SLAVE ...................................................................... 19610.2.5 Slave Visualization in Master .......................................................................... 19710.2.6 State Information........................................................................................... 19710.2.7 Line Formats and Orders................................................................................ 19710.2.8 Device Frame ............................................................................................... 19810.2.9 Log File, Audit Trail........................................................................................ 198
10.3 PSM........................................................................................................................... 198
11 Backup and Restore Settings 199
12 PLM direct 20012.1 Starting PLM direct ....................................................................................................... 20012.2 Creating a PLM direct device ......................................................................................... 20012.3 Installation Guide PLM Direct Arvato Connector................................................................ 20212.4 Example XML for import................................................................................................ 204
13 Appendix 20713.1 User Rights Table......................................................................................................... 20713.2 Device Classes ............................................................................................................ 21513.3 AI Management ........................................................................................................... 21813.4 Reports....................................................................................................................... 229
13.4.1 Bollini Report................................................................................................ 23013.4.2 China Serial Report........................................................................................ 23113.4.3 French Order Report....................................................................................... 23313.4.4 Order Counter Report ..................................................................................... 23413.4.5 Order Summary Report .................................................................................. 23713.4.6 Hierarchy Report ........................................................................................... 23913.4.7 Line Format Report ........................................................................................ 24013.4.8 Logfile Report ............................................................................................... 24113.4.9 Order Confirm Report ..................................................................................... 243
13.5 Regular Expressions..................................................................................................... 24413.6 Date Values................................................................................................................. 24713.7 Supported Printers........................................................................................................ 24813.8 Abbreviations and Terms .............................................................................................. 24913.9 Troubleshooting Guide.................................................................................................. 250
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 7 / 274
Inten
tiona
lly le
ft blan
k
8 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
1 Introduction to the Manual
1.1 Scope and Intended UsersThis manual describes how to use and configure the PCE Line Manager (PLM). It is intended for personnelwho operate the PLM in order to control a vision inspection system for packing lines.This includes:• Operators• Supervisors• Administrators• EngineersAll vision products from METTLER TOLEDO PCE use the PLM software. Consequently, this manual isapplicable for all PCE vision products.
For information on how to use the PLM in combination with an ERP system, read the PCE Site Manager(PSM) Operator Manual.
1.2 ServiceIf you wish to contact the Service Department, please have as much information on hand as possible:• Machine type• Serial number• Line name• METTLER TOLEDO PCE order number and date• Software version• Precise wording of the displayed error message or detailed fault description• Your contact detailsThe Service Department will send you a technical questionnaire to analyze your technical request.Completing this questionnaire will help us to solve your technical issue in an efficient way.
Country E-Mail Address PhoneAustria [email protected] +43 1 6041990
France [email protected] +33 825 00 15 15
Germany [email protected] +49 5121 933 160
Korea [email protected] +82 2 3498 3566
Switzerland [email protected] +41 44 944 47 47
USA, Mexico [email protected] +1 630-446-7716
Rest of the World [email protected] +49 6251 8545-555
1.3 LanguageThis English document is the original document.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 9 / 274
1.4 Formatting and MeaningThe formats used in this manual have determined meanings. If they are used they denote the following:
Format MeaningPC Menu Paths, Buttons at the screen surface, fixed tab
names, names of screens and dialogs
'apostrophes' Names of fields, checkboxes, modes, parameters
<angle brackets> wildcard for tab names of devices (individual namescan be assigned)
Bold
1.5 Visibility of Buttons and ScreensAlways remember that many PLM features need certain user rights. This means if your screen does not offerbuttons shown in the operator manual it is likely that you need more user rights which have to be assignedto your profile by an administrator. The usual way to assign user rights is to add a user to a user group.Thus the user obtains all user rights belonging to that group.
1.6 How to Use ScreenshotsBelow each screen you see the path how to get there1. Additional actions that are to perform at this screenare described below the screen2. Wildcard buttons3 and actions at the path4 are placed in brackets. See thefollowing example:
1Home>(<select smart camera bar>)3 > Menu > Product management > New product >(enter product name)4 > Enter (at the keyboard) > Live Image
2 Press Next.
10 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
2 General Information
2.1 Menu TreeThe menu tree shows the maximum possible menu structure of the system. Depending on user rights,certain menus may not be visible.
Main Menu Sub Menu
Login
System Settings Edit System SettingsCreate / Edit DeviceEdit Device SettingsSwitch LineSecond Signature Message ConfirmationSecond Signature Action ConfigurationERP Data over XML ConfigurationEdit Month Name ListSystem InformationRemove / Save Error ImagesEULA (End User License Agreement)
Log File Management
User Management Add UserRightsGroups<User>
Backup Backup Log FileBackup Camera Formats
Production Start Production via OrderTest Run via Line FormatAdd / Edit OrderAdd / Edit Line FormatAdd / Edit ProductOrder Results Create ReportAI ManagementReset Order StatusMove Order to LineMove Serial Numbers to Order
Statistics CountersPrint QualityDB StatisticsHistoryStatistics of GarvensWeigher
Home
Confirm
Help
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 11 / 274
2.2 Screen Elements OverviewThe following figure shows the appearance of the PLM Interface. The example shows the devicesettings screen.
System Settings > Edit device settings > (<PLC tab>)
Pos. Name Function1 Program head Statistical data of the production (current format, status of production,
batch number and line name) as well as the registered user
2 Login / LogoutButton
By clicking this button you can log in or log off.
3 Tab menu The tab menu allows navigating to specific information and devicesettings. Note: The names of the device tabs can be assigned freely (seechapter [Creating a Device } Page 36]).
4 Menu panel With these buttons you navigate to the main functions. These buttons arefixed.
5 Sub Navigation Here the buttons for current interaction are displayed. If an alarm occurs itis displayed here.
6 - Here you can navigate to additional options if applicable.
7 Status Bar At the status bar error messages (red), warnings (yellow) and modifi-cations, e.g. of line format, user log-in and log-off, start/stop of production(green) will be displayed. If several messages are displayed, this will besignaled by ^ after the message. By clicking the status line the informationhistory will be called. The current date and time are always visible in theleft corner of the status bar.
12 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
2.3 Starting the PLMTo start the PLM and the line follow the sequence listed below:1. Turn on the power supply of the stations and devices without having the PLM installed. For example,
this can be MAS, SCS, ABS. Wait until software is completely up and running.2. Turn on the power supply of the stations having the PLM installed. This is usually only the DMS but can
also be another station. Wait until software is completely up and running.To automate this delay, the startup waiting time at the PLM has to be configured. Press SystemSettings > Edit System Settings. At the parameter ‘WT01 Startup waiting time’ set a checkmarkat the checkbox and set the waiting time to 20 seconds. See the following screen:
System Settings > Edit system settings (Start up waiting time)
Meet sequence of turning on stationsIt is essential to start at first stations and devices without having the PLM installed. If notretaining the sequence an IP-address conflict can occur.
2.4 Logging In and Logging OutAll rights in the PLM are user dependent. Different users see different screens and can perform different tasksin the PLM. After starting the PCE Line Manager you have to log in to get access to further functions in themenu panel on the right hand side of the screen.
Login
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 13 / 274
Upon clicking the log-in button in the upper right corner theinput of a user name and password will be necessary.Depending on the rights of the registered user further functionswill be available (see chapter [Administration of Users andGroups } Page 20]).
The name of the presently registered user will be displayed onthe button (here <Administrator 1>)
EULAWhenever the PLM version changes, the EULA will show up. You have to accept it at the very first start ofPLM with a new version. The EULA will not show up from the second start on.
Password
Change password if requiredUpon first login, the user may be asked to change his password (depending on the systemsettings).
Change of UserWhen a different user wants to operate the PCE Line Manager, the previous user will have to log out first. Itis guaranteed herewith that the created log and production files can be assigned to a specific user.
Setting Auto Log Out TimeAn auto log out can be adjusted optionally. The user will be logged out automatically after a preset time, aslong as he is not entering any data at the terminal. This functionality can be set under the system settings.
If using an external keyboard the keyboard displayed on thescreen can be switched off for the duration of the registrationof the user by pressing Keyboard.
Screen Keyboard can be disabled- The screen keyboard can be disabled during registration of a user by pressing keyboard. Itcan also be switched off globally for all users (see chapter [System ParametersList } Page 31]) - (Using Disconnect, all connected devices are disconnected. This is a debug function forthe PCE maintenance technician!)
admin (active user button)
The following buttons at the logout screen are only displayed for administrator and engineer users:• Exit to OS• System shutdown
14 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
• PCE Line Manager shutdown
• System rebootThe supervisor and operator do not see any additional buttons at the logout screen. Select one of thefunctions and confirm with OK or directly confirm with OK to log out.
2.5 Input FunctionEasy operation of the PLM by fingertip is possible thanks to the 15-inch touch display. You can operate thekeyboard displayed on the screen if inputs need to be made. The keyboard is displayed automatically, ifneeded, by clicking an input field. The appearance of the keyboard depends on the country settings.As per hardware keyboard the next field can be accessed by Tab and Shift changes to capital letters.
Keyboard1
The respective active input field, where datacan be entered will be highlighted yellow.Depending on the position of the input fieldthe keyboard will be displayed either in theupper or lower third of the screen, as suchthat the corresponding input field willremain visible.
Move the keyboard by dragging moving and dropping it.
With these arrows the keyboard can be positioned on the upper orlower end of the screen.
Close the keyboard by pressing this button.
Switch language.
Keyboard size.
By pressing Enter the focused button at the screen will be executed. This button is easily recognized bythe black frame (see the Login button at the following example).
Frame
If using an external keyboard the keyboard displayed on the screencan be switched off for the duration of the registration of the user bypressing the button Keyboard.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 15 / 274
Alternative Keyboard ConfigurationOptionally a modern keyboard designed analog to the Android smart phone keyboards can be used. TheLauncher.bat file has to be called with the parameter –fxkeyboard.
Keyboard2
Control key functions:
Hide keyboard
Switch to other language keyboard layout
Switch to special character and number layout
Switch to control key layout
Special character and number layout:
Keyboard
Keyboard
2.5.1 Remote ControlIf you want to control the PLM software via remote control, use a common remote desktop program e.g.Teamviewer©. In addition, you need an internet connection; performance will be dependent on the speed ofyour internet connection.
2.5.2 Taking ScreenshotsPreparation1. In the system settings, activate the option for parameter 'PA03 Print-Screen Path'.2. Enter the directory path.
16 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
3. ClickSave.
4. To apply the settings, restart the PLM.You need an external keyboard.
ProcedureTo trigger a screenshot of the current screen, press the <print key> button at the external keyboard.
2.6 Home ScreenThe following figure shows the Home screen:
Home (while production is running)
Pos. Name Function1 Device Status
BarsThe main menu of the PCE Line Manager always remains visible. All operatingelements available are displayed in order to be able to change between theprogram functions (depending on the authorization level of the user).
2 Counter (Good/Bad/Overall) of the devices attached
Help ButtonThe Help button contains a HTML version of this documentation and is always visible in the lower rightcorner of the status line.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 17 / 274
3 Functions Overview
3.1 ScopeThe PCE Line Manager (PLM) is the line management component of the PCE Software Suite. The PLMcontrols and administrates centrally at one line the devices such as printers, cameras and scanners.During start of production, the connected devices are provided with static data (e.g. LOT and EXP). As anoption, a database connection for serialization is possible (this ensures a distinct traceability of the singleunit from the manufacturer to the patient. The operator is able to manage with minimum effort all devices atthe line; the provided settings are stored in the central database.
In case of Serialization/Aggregation:A clear traceability of the individual packaging from the manufacturer right up to the patient is guaranteed.
Production line track and trace
3.2 Marking and Capturing of ItemsThe individual packaging units are typically marked via inkjet or laser printer. Thereafter they are verifiedimmediately via a multifunctional Smart Camera as to correct data content and readability.
In case of Serialization/Aggregation:The status of every unit will be registered in order to ensure traceability. All units classified as bad will beejected immediately and only units classified as good proceed the packaging process.The counter readings produced during the evaluation process are displayed in real-time and are stored inthe database after stop or completion of the production.
Datamanagement complies with 21 CFR Part 11 directivesData management and storage as well as operation of the software are in compliance with the21 CFR Part 11 directives.
3.3 Link of Control DevicesThe monitoring devices are connected directly via LAN interface, if there is one. If there is no LAN interface,devices are then connected via RS232 to LAN boxes. To the extent that this is feasible, devices areconnected in accordance with the current directives of the VDMA-Standard “VDMAXML_P”. An intelligentcomponent assures compatibility for units without VDMAXML_P capabilities.
18 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
If their interfaces are exposed, new devices can be rapidly and easily integrated with a custom-developedmodular concept. The PLM is able to communicate with other devices via Ethernet, USB and RS232.
Line
man
agem
ent
and
adm
inis
tratio
nCo
mpo
nent
s at
the
line
Ethernet TCP/IP
SMC HRC LAS HandholdScanner
Printer(e.g. m600)
PLC etc.
PCE Line Manager - IPC + HMI
Compliance with the 21 CFR Part 11Data management and storage as well as operation of the software are in compliance with the21 CFR Part 11 directives.
3.4 Level DefinitionsThis is an overview of the control levels and aggregation ranks at the aggregation/serialization process. Thefollowing figure is an example how a visual inspection production can basically look like. The detailedstructure of your system is defined at the functional specification.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 19 / 274
4 Administration of Users and GroupsThe User Management settings at the PLM are equivalent to the settings at the PSM. Both systems use thesame user profiles. At the PLM all user rights are being managed centrally. Name, password and certainrights are assigned to each user access/group respectively. The type of right/group determines access to thepossible program functions.
User Management is pre-configuredUpon start-up the user management is pre-configured from PCE service staff!
A user management is included in order to add/edit and delete users and groups. All functions in thesoftware can be restricted due to user rights, assigned to a group or user. Rights can be assigned directly toa user, or along with other rights building a group which can then be assigned to a user.
4.1 User ManagementTo open the User Management - User rights screen press User Management at the menu panel on theright hand side of the screen. At the overview you can select the user you want to edit or you can create anew user.
User Management
ADS loginIt is possible to connect/login to an Active Directory Server without creating extra users for thePCE Line Manager. The login via active directory will return a user level which is mapped tocertain groups from the PLM. See chapter [Active Directory } Page 27].
20 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
4.1.1 Creating a New User1 Go to User Management.2 To create a new user click Add. The following screen appears:
User Management > Add
3 Enter the new username and a password.
NOTICEChoose a secure passwordThe password strength corresponds to the security of the password. A secure passwordcontains lower-case and upper-case letters, numbers and also special characters.
4 Confirm with OK. More options and buttons are shown:
ð The user is created. See the following chapters for more information.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 21 / 274
4.1.2 Editing a User AccountAfter you have selected a user to edit, the following screen appears:
User Management > Add > OK
The following options for the user can be set:• User account valid until: Here you can set how long the user account will be valid. Enter a date. After
this date access is automatically blocked.• User has to change password at next login: At the next login the user is requested to change the
password that was given by the administrator. The password strength corresponds to the security of thepassword. A secure password contains lower-case and upper-case letters, numbers and also specialcharacters.
• Locked: A user account can be locked and released. If a user no longer needs its account, access canbe locked. If a user enters the wrong password several times (number is depending upon systemsettings), the account is automatically locked. Only users with specific rights can unlock the useraccount again.
With the buttons at the lower part of the screen you can call up the corresponding functions as described inthe following chapters. The table below gives an overview of these functions:
Name FunctionGroups... Add the selected user to the desired group. See chapter [Adding a User to
a Group } Page 23].
Rights... Add the desired rights to the selected user. See chapter [Adding orWithdrawing Rights to a User } Page 23].
Change Password... Change the password of the selected user. See chapter [Changing thePassword of a User } Page 24].
Delete... Delete the selected user. See chapter [Deleting a UserAccount } Page 24].
22 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
4.1.3 Adding a User to a GroupSelect a user (see chapter [User Management } Page 20]) and press Groups. The following screenappears:
User Management > (User) > Groups
Select the group to which you want to add the user and press Add. A screen appears where you can see towhich groups the user is already added to. Choose the group where the user has to be added. Repeat thisstep to add the user to additional groups. If you want to withdraw the user from a group, select the groupand press Delete. Once you have finished editing the affiliation of the user confirm with OK to leave thescreen.
4.1.4 Adding or Withdrawing Rights to a User
1 Select a user (see chapter [User Management } Page 20]).
2 Click Rights. A screen appears where you can see all existing rights:
User Management > (User) > Rights
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 23 / 274
3 Optional: If you want to search for a certain right, you have the possibility to enter a filter:
4 Select all rights you want to add to this user.
5 Click Save.
ð The rights are added to the user.
6 If you want to withdraw user rights, deselect the right you want to withdraw and click Save.
4.1.5 Changing the Password of a UserSelect a user (see chapter [User Management } Page 20]) and press Change password. The followingscreen appears:
ser Management >(User) > Change password
The password strength corresponds to the security of the password. A secure password contains lower-caseand upper-case letters, numbers, and also special characters.
Enter the new password, retype it, and confirm with OK.
4.1.6 Deleting a User AccountSelect a user (see chapter [User Management } Page 20]), press Delete and confirm with OK.
4.2 Creating and Editing GroupsWithin the groups menu you can create new groups. The "Level" setting (1 … 10) enables administratorswho do not have the "maySeeAllUsers" right to view and edit all users on lower levels (for user adminis-tration purposes).
24 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Press User Management at the menu panel on the right hand side of the screen in order to get to the UserManagement - Groups screen. Then press Groups. The following screen appears:
User Management > Groups
4.2.1 Creating a New GroupGo to the User Management - Groups screen (see chapter [Creating and Editing Groups } Page 24]) andpress Add. The following screen appears:
User Management > Groups > Add
Enter the new group name and assign a level to the group. If required add a note. Confirm with OK.
4.2.2 Adding or Withdrawing Rights to a Groupand press Add. At the following screen you can see which rights are already added to the group:
1 Go to the User Management - Groups screen (see chapter [Creating and Editing Groups } Page 24]).
2 Select the group you want to edit.
3 Press Rights.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 25 / 274
4 Select the rights you want to add to the group. See also chapter [Adding or Withdrawing Rights to aUser } Page 23].
User Management > Groups > Rights
5 Click Save.
6 If you want to withdraw user rights, deselect the right you want to withdraw and click Save.
4.2.3 Deleting a Group AccountGo to the User Management - Groups screen (see chapter [Creating and Editing Groups } Page 24]),select the group you want to delete, and press Delete. The group is deleted immediately.
User Management > Groups > (select group)
26 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
4.3 Active DirectoryNotice: These settings can only be executed by experts with respective authorization. Active Directoryrequires global settings (see chapter [Changing global System Settings } Page 177]).Three basic steps have to be performed to connect the local database with Active Directory:
Step 1 - LDAP environment:1. Register groups2. Assign user to created groups
Step 2 - PLM environment:1. Create identical groups as created in the LDAP environment in the PLM2. Define rights for the respective groups in PLM
Step 3 – PLM System Settings:1. Select System Settings2. Enter IP address (Host name) of the Active Directory Server in AD013. Enter domain name of the Active Directory domain in AD024. Enter Active Directory search path in AD035. Enter Active Directory search filter in AD04
Configuration Example:
System Settings > Edit System Settings
Time synchronization is only required if there is a Kerberos authentication. This needs to be changed indomain controller.
Login if Active Directory is not accessibleIf Active Directory is not accessible, there is a standard user in all of the groups. Use this standard user tologin to PLM (see chapter [User Rights Table } Page 207]).
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 27 / 274
5 Preparation for Production
5.1 Overview of ProductionThis is an overview on what has to be done prior producing a product.
Step Action Comment Explanation0 Create devices (precondition) Select Device Class. Set device Name and Settings.
1 Create product (optionally) See product management
2 Add a line format Add a line format Name the line format. Assign a product if applicable.Information and settings on how a line is built up:which devices are used at the line format
Edit device settingsat line format
AI fields that have to be used are selected. (PLC,camera, printer…)
3 Create an order Information about and settings of an order includingthe AI values are entered. A line format is assignedand also a product can be assigned.
5.2 Creating and Editing DevicesImportant System settings have to be made, devices have to be created. Possible devices are:• Printers• Cameras• Hand Scanner• PLC• UPS• Com Interfaces• Servers• Comparator VGL7/VGL8• Checkweigher• Garvens Checkweigher
5.2.1 The System Settings Overview ScreenIn this menu users with administrator rights can change important system parameters.
System settings should only be changed by trained personnelThe PCE tool setter pre-configures system settings at start-up! Changes of these settings canlead to a shutdown of the device!
To open the System Settings overview, press System Settings at the menu panel on the right hand side ofthe screen. The following screen appears:
28 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
At the appearing screen the available buttons lead to the functions as follows:
Name Function
Edit device settings List where you can edit, enable or disable system-wide parameters
Create/edit device Create or edit devices for usage in line
Edit device settings Edit settings of the devices
Switch line Select another line for production
Second signature messageconfiguration
Define messages which need to be confirmed by second signature
Second signature actionconfiguration
Define actions which need to be confirmed by second signature
ERP data over XML Configu-ration
Define paths, where the PLM gets order and product data of an XMLdocument
Edit Month name list Define input and output format for the name of the month
System information Here you get information about the system like database and installeddevices
Remove/Save error images Remove or save error images
EULA View the End User License Agreement (EULA)
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 29 / 274
5.2.2 Editing System Settings
NOTICEPLM Module Overrides System SettingsThe PLM module 'System SettingsExtensions' overrides system settings in the line format.See chapter [SystemSettingsExtension module } Page 88].
At this screen you can edit parameters which are valid for the whole system. Press Edit system settings atthe System Settings overview (see chapter [The System Settings Overview Screen } Page 28]). Thefollowing screen appears:
System Settings > Edit System Settings
To enable a parameter select the corresponding checkbox and set a value if applicable. Grayed outcheckboxes are global system settings, how to change them see chapter [Changing global SystemSettings } Page 177]. To apply changes at the system settings, the PLM has to be restarted. The tablebelow lists all parameters that can be set here:
30 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
5.2.3 System Parameters List
ID Parameter Description Default Allowed ValuesAD01 Active Directory
server nameName of the server with theActive Directory
- Alphanumeric
AD02 Active Directorydomain name
Domain name of the serverwith the Active Directory
- Alphanumeric
AD03 Active Directorysearch path
Search path in which the serveris found with the ActiveDirectory.
- Valid Path
AD04 Active Directorysearch filter
Type of user admin (&(objectClass=user))
Alphanumeric
AD05 Kerberos Use Kerberos authentication Inactive Checkbox
AD06 JAAS login configu-ration file
Configuration for ActiveDirectory
- Valid Path
AD07 Passwordexpiration in daysfor warnings
Checks the AD user accountexpiration date. If the expirationdate is in XX days, inform theuser.
14 Numeric (Days)
AD08 External programfor passwordchange
PLM is unable to change thepassword for an activedirectory user account due totechnical restrictions. However,when an external applicationfor changing the password isspecified in this setting, thepassword change button willappear and when clicked theapplication will be called tochange the password.
- -
AD09 Always showChange Passwordbutton
If the external passwordchange program (AD08) is setand this setting is enabled, the'change password' button willappear on the login screen.
Inactive Checkbox
AD10 Kerberos configu-ration file
Path to additional ActiveDirectory Security Settings(Kerberos configuration file).
C:\PCE\PLM\distri-bution\ActiveDi-rectory\krb5.ini
Valid Path
SU01 Max. no. of wronglogins:
Maximal number of wronglogins which locks furtherlogins.
3 Numeric
SU02 Time betweenwrong logins(minutes):
Time after a wrong login, afterthe count of maximal wronglogins is reset.
0 Numeric
SU03 Automatic login A user who is used if nobody islogged in.
- Username
SU04 Password strength: Calculated value for safety ofpassword. “0” if passworddoesn’t match with rules.
0 0 … 255
SU05 Password - validity(months):
Number of month after apassword must be changes.
12 Numeric
SU06 Password history: Number of passwords until anold password can be usedagain.
5 Numeric
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 31 / 274
ID Parameter Description Default Allowed ValuesSU07 Automatic logout
(minutes):Number of minutes with noaction after the user is loggedout.
30 Numeric
SU08 Keyboard alwaysON:
Activation / de-activation of thetouch screen when PCE LineManager is operated using theexternal keyboard.Yes = Work with touch screenNo = Work with mouse andkeyboard
YES Checkbox
SE01 Company Prefix Used for SSCC values (Aggre-gation)
- Numeric
SE02-SE04
SSCC ExtensionCode
Prefix for SSCC_Values, that therank defines
0/1/2 0 … 9
SR00 -SR08
Rank 0 description:…Rank 8description:
Description of the Ranks(hierarchical level)
Global/Unit/Bundle/Case/Pallet
Alphanumeric
FP01 –FP08
SN Fix Part Rank1:...SN Fix PartRank 8:
Fixed part of the serial numberfor the relevant rank
- Alphanumeric
SL01 -SL08
SN var. length Rank1:...SN var. lengthRank 8:
Length of the variable portionof the serial number
12 Numeric
SX01 SN extraPercentage:
Reserve volume of additional(not used) serial numbers inpercent
0 Numeric
SA01 –SA08
SN Algo Rank1:...SN Algo Rank8:
Algorithm for generating serialnumbers:INC: incremental generation ofserial numbers INCRND<Number>: Chancenumbers between zero and<Number>
INC INC<Number> /INCRND<Number>
ES01 ERP SN Ranges: Takes over/does not take overthe serial number from ERP
Inactive Checkbox
PA01 PDF templatespath:
Directory for filing the PDFreport templates. This can bedone centrally for several lines.If the field is empty, thestandard folder of the PCETnTdirectory will be used.
- Valid UNC path.
PA02 PDF path: Directory for filing the PDFreports of the line. This can bedone centrally. If the field isempty, the standard folder ofthe PCETnT directory will beused.
- Valid UNC path.
PA03 Print screen path: Path for screenshots of thePLM. Enter the directory path,e.g. D:\pictures. Triggering isdone via external keyboard bypressing the print key.
- Checkbox
SI01 Second signature: Switches on whether SecondSignature is active or not.
Inactive Checkbox
32 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
ID Parameter Description Default Allowed ValuesSI02 Second signature
group:When activated, only userswho join the “SI02 SecondSignature” group are allowed toconfirm signatures.
- Checkbox
SV01 Supervisor station: Switches the software to thesupervisor mode.
Inactive Checkbox
EI01 Max error imagescount
Max. number of error imagesleft in memory.
10 Numeric
EX01 ERP over XML When activated data areimported from PSM.
Inactive Checkbox
XP01 ERP over XML path Path of XML documents in adata transfer.
- Valid Path
XP02 ERP over XMLconfirmation path
Path of XML confirmation file. - Valid Path
IP01 must be an IPaddress or areachable hostname.
IP address, which defines byseveral network cards in theaddress area of the devices.
- Valid Path
EM01 ERP XVIEW Mode Imports/does not import theorders from ERP.
Inactive Checkbox
DP01 Parallel devicesstart up:
Activates/deactivates theparallel loading of the orderdata to the devices (accel-erated production start).
Inactive Checkbox
EF01 Allow empty fieldin order table
Only for “French Coding”.Empty fields are not printedand not checked.
Inactive Checkbox
RF01 Reset readers ref.code
After finishing production,invalid reference codes are sentto all reading devices toprevent reading of codes afterproduction is finished.
Inactive Checkbox
WT01 Start up waitingtime (sec.)
If a database connection ismissing, a start delay can beset. The setting is effective afterrebooting the PLM as well ason the initial start.
0 Numeric
US01 PLC not UPSsupplied
If there is a power failureduring production, an attemptto read the last counter by thePLC will fail. This will avoidblocking the PCE LineManager application.
Inactive Checkbox
PS01 Parallel devicesconnection
Activates/deactivates theparallel start of the deviceswhen starting up.
Inactive Checkbox
FR07 Filter Open Order: Customized ERP order import. Inactive Checkbox
DR01 Dynamic DeviceRanks
The device rank is variable andis defined in the line format.
Inactive Checkbox
KA01 Keep Agg.RankState:
In case of production inter-ruptions, the input productranks will not be deleted, theywill be saved.
- 2…8, separated bycomma (e.g. 2,3,5)
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 33 / 274
ID Parameter Description Default Allowed ValuesFR01 Set finished order
read-only:At the end of order the statuswill be set to “4” instead of“3” (usually it is set to “3”).Thus, it will not be possible tocommission and decom-mission manually.
Inactive Checkbox
LC01 Local Cache Mode Activates/deactivates bufferingof the order data in order to beable to continue productionwithout database connection.
Inactive Checkbox
LC02 Local CacheRework Mode
Download all serial numbersfrom the global database to thelocal database for future orderrework.
Inactive Checkbox
EA01 Allow empty aggre-gation
Allows aggregation of emptycases to pallet although acontent count is defined.
Inactive Checkbox
RA01 Reprint new serial When reprinting a damagedlabel, the new label gets a newserial number instead ofreusing the old serial number.
Inactive Checkbox
HC01 Helpercode length: Defines the default length ofhelper code
6 Numeric
DN01 Decommission notAgg.units on Rank:
Defines a list of aggregatedranks that are automaticallydecommissioned. (Only withmodulePCE_DECOM_FINALIZER)deprecated. See chapter[PCE_DECOM_FINALIZER } Page 79].
- Alphanumeric(comma separatedlist of ranks)
DV01 Disable orderdatecheck
Allows to disable the check oforder date values.• If off, expiration dates (GS1
AI17) must be in the future,production dates (GS1 AI11) in the past
• If on, all valid dates areallowed.
Inactive Checkbox
RV01 Enable HTML reportviewer
If enabled, reports can bepreviewed within an PLMinternal document viewer. Ifdisabled, an HTML version of agenerated report can beopened in a (external)webbrowser for preview.
Inactive Checkbox
AC01 AlphanumericAlgorithmCharactars
List of allowed characters to beused with ALNUM serialgenerator algorithm.
0123456789ABCDEFGHI-
JKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Alphanumeric
PS02 Auto Stop Prod.First Rank
If enabled, production automat-ically is suspended after theamount of products defined inAI R06 is reached for thelowest work order rank (Batchsize R06).
Inactive Checkbox
34 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
ID Parameter Description Default Allowed ValuesPS03 Auto Stop Prod.
Last RankIf enabled, production automat-ically is suspended after theamount of products defined inAI R06 is reached for thehighest work order rank (Batchsize R06).
Inactive Checkbox
HI01 Order Unit History Allows to track every event thatchanges the state of a serialnumber during the production.Creates a gapless history of thecomplete production.
Inactive Checkbox
QA01 Quality Sample OnAll Ranks
Allows to book out QA samplesan all available ranks (default:only allowed for unit rank 1).Determines visibility of button'Tag as Sample' on thehierarchy and info screens.
Inactive Checkbox
SD01 Stop on unexpecteddata
If enabled, production isautomatically stopped ifunexpected data isencountered (example: camerareads an unknown productcode).
Inactive Checkbox
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 35 / 274
5.2.4 Creating a DeviceBefore a device can be used in the system it has to be "created" in the PLM. This chapter describes how tocreate and edit devices.
1 To create a device, open the System Settings screen (see chapter[The System Settings OverviewScreen } Page 28]).
2 Press Create/edit device. At the Device table for line: screen you see which devices are alreadycreated in the PLM:
3 Click Add.The dialog Add new device opens.
4 Enter an individual name for the device. This will be the name for the device tab at the line format. Forclarity we recommend to name the devices as follows: (Station on which the device is used)_(Device).Examples:ð XMV_SMCð ABS_HRC
5 From the list Class name: select the appropriate driver for the device. The class contains predefineddevice formats. At the device formats the fields to be printed on a product are defined. At the line formatthe device formats and their fields are loaded.
6 Optional: Select a device owner.(Virtual Device Owner): Device owner refers to a single master devicethat exists physically but is to fulfill several functions on various ranks. If a device does not support thevirtualization mode, the device owner field is disabled.ð Example: A printer needs to be able to print different labels on 2 different ranks. It is first registered as
a normal "PrinterMaster" device. This is the owner or master. This printer is then registered a secondtime as a virtual "PrinterSlave" device with the owner device: "PrinterMaster". The second printer isthen assigned to another rank. Thus there are now two devices in the PCE Line Manager that canprint out labels on a master device.
36 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
7 Click OK.
ð The device is created and listed in the Device table for line:.
NOTICEDevice not visibleIf you do not see the device in the list immediately, restart the PLM.
Sequence of Devices (Sort)At the column 'Sort' in the Device table for line: you can assign numbers to the devices. The sequenceentered here will be adopted for the device bars at the Home screen and for the tabs at the Edit devicesettings screen.
Button 'Reconnect'
NOTICETrained personnel onlyThis option is to be used by PCE service staff only as it's functionality depends on theselected device.
To see the button, you need to have the user right 'maySeeButtonReconnect'.
5.2.5 Deleting a DeviceTo delete a device select it at the Device table for line: (see chapter [Creating a Device } Page 36]) screenand press Remove.
If a device is still linked to a line it is not possible to delete it. The following error message appears: "Deviceis linked to X configuration(s)". All line formats that are connected to the device are listed in the alarmmessage. Confirm the message by pressing Confirm and deactivate the device at the line or delete the lineformat.
5.2.6 PLC
System Settings > Edit device settings > (Select PLC tab)
At the PLC tab scroll down.With the buttons at the lower part of the screen you can call up the corresponding functions as described inthe following chapters. The table below gives an overview of these functions:
Name FuctionParameter Set, delete and edit PLC parameters
Messages Set, delete and edit PLC messages
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 37 / 274
Name FuctionCounter Configure PLC counter
Import/Export Import and export of parameters, messages and countersThe path of the exported files is <PLM installation >\plm-core\distribution\PLC\
Teach PLC configuration (e.g. inform of the positions of the devices and the sensors)
The table below gives an overview of the possible PLC settings of the screen above:
Parameter Description Default value Allowedvalues
Name Freely selectable name - Alphanumeric
Description Optional description - Alphanumeric
PLCType Type of the used PLC S7_200_compatible
Drop-down list
automaticMode When automatic mode is active, manualoperation of the device is not possible.
checkmark set Checkbox
boxingRank Hierarchy level (1) Unit 0 ... 8
counterRefreshTime Refresh time [ms] for the PCE Line Manager toask for new counter values from the PLC
1000 Numeric
heartBeatPLCTime Time [ms] for the PLC to check the connectionto the IPC
1000 Numeric
heartBeatPilotTime Time [ms] for the PCE Line Manager to checkthe connection to the PLC
1000 Numeric
internalFormats PLC to administer internal formats checkmark notset
Checkbox
ip IP address of the device - Valid IPaddress
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged (TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
needDeviceFormat Device appears on the line format. Printedstatus
checkmark set Checkbox
readTimeOut Waiting [ms] time for an answer before timeout 1000 Numeric
shiftRegister Display of the shift register in the overview checkmark notset
Checkbox
shiftRegisterRefreshTime Update time [ms] of the shift register display 200 Numeric
statusBitWaitTime Time [s], end of production after a timeout ofthe PLC.
10 Numeric
watchDogTime Time [ms] to ask for errors 500 Numeric
writeCounters PLC counter readings are stored in thedatabase in case of discontinuation or stop ofthe production.
checkmark notset
Checkbox
ShowDeviceFrame Activates/deactivates display of the device inthe menu “overview”.
checkmark set Checkbox
38 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
5.2.6.1 Import / Export (XML settings file)
Figure: System Settings > Edit device settings > (select PLC) > Import/Export
Press Import all settings. The screen looks as follows:
Figure: System Settings > Edit device settings > (select PLC) > Import/Export >(select file)
Select the XML file suitable for the PLC version and press Open.
5.2.6.2 Parameters
At the following screen you can edit the PLC parameters.
Setting parameter globallyIf you want to set a parameter globally for all line formats (settings are not editable at the line format) set acheckmark at its checkbox. Then the values have to be entered here at the system settings.
Setting parameter locallyIf you want to change the parameters locally at the line format (settings have to be set at the line format) setno checkmark at its checkbox. Then the values have to be entered at each line format.Setting a checkmark makes parameter global. Setting no checkmark makes the setting local.• Global: Checkmark set• Local at device: Checkmark not set
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 39 / 274
The screen looks as follows:
System Settings > Edit device settings > (select PLC) > Parameter
5.2.6.3 Teach
Press Teach in order to load the XML data to the PLC. Press Save to save the PLC settings.
5.2.6.4 PLC Siemens
Home > PLC
Class name: Siemens SPS IP / SPS PPIOnly the counters are displayed
40 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
5.2.7 PrintersIn this chapter the main settings of some printers are described exemplarily. Some settings should bechanged by trained personnel only.You can find a list of all supported printers in the Appendix: [Supported Printers } Page 248]
5.2.7.1 Printer Mode
The setting ‘printerMode’ configures printers and distinguishes aggregation from serialization/static printers.
Mode Description ExampleAGGREGATE_PRINTER These printers are only used on
ranks > 1 and are supplied withlabels individually.
ABS Bundle Label Printer
BUFFERED_PRINTER This is the standard setting forserialization or static printers onrank 1. On this setting, the printer(if online) loads the internal bufferwith labels at beginning ofproduction.
DMS Wolke Printer
HC_PRINTER Prints helper codes.
COPY_PRINTER Prints data read by a reader(COPY_READER Mode).
Temporally delayed reprint of atemporally aggregation label.
DISTRIBUTION_PRINTER Print buffer. Collects printing datafrom DISTRIBUTION_READER andprints at a defined time.
LINEFORMAT This mode changes the setting ofthe device settings to line format,in which ‘Aggregate Printer’ and‘Buffered Printer’ can then beselected.
5.2.7.2 Wolke m600 advanced/oem
There are three different printer drivers with similar settings.• Wolke_M600_Advanced
Classic driver for the advanced model.• Wolke_M600_OEM
Is using the classic protocol for the oem.• Wolke_M600_UTF8
Is using the Jason protocol for the oem and supports Unicode fonts.
Parameter Description Default value Allowed valuesName Name that has been assigned in the
device management settings.- Alphanumeric
Description Optional description - Alphanumeric
boxingRank Hierarchy level (1) Unit 0 ... 3
internalFormats Printer manages internal formats Checkmark set Checkbox
automaticMode When automatic mode is active, manualoperation of the device is not possible.
Checkmark set Checkbox
needDeviceFormat Determines whether the device is jointlyused in the line format.
Checkmark set Checkbox
showDeviceFrame Activates/deactivates the display of thedevice in the menu “overview”.
Checkmark set Checkbox
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged(TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 41 / 274
buffer Number of datasets to be buffered in theprinter. Some printers do not support abuffer and do not have this parameter.
18 Numeric
PLCName Name of the printer for the PLC(Printer 1 … Printer 8)
- Drop-down list
printerMode See chapter [Printer Mode } Page 41]. BUFFERED_PRINTER Drop-down list
reprintMode Enabling/ disabling label reprint. It can bedefined in the device settings of the printeror in the line format. The reprint itselfoccurs only on the printers with enabledsetting.
ENABLED Drop-down list
ip IP address of the device - Valid IP address
port Port number Printer model/protocol specific
Numeric
remoteLabel If the option is activated, labels are loadedautomatically.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
labelPath Only if remoteLabel is activated: locationfor labels
- Windows folder path
debugMode Output of errors/warnings/messages. Onlyfor PCE purposes
Checkmark not set Checkbox
watchDogTime[sec]:
The printer has to confirm the connectionin seconds periodically.
0 Numeric
selfTrigger If the option is activated, printer messagesare evaluated to refill the buffer.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
5.2.7.3 Zebra
Parameter Description Default value Allowed valuesName Freely selectable name - Alphanumeric
Description Optional description - Alphanumeric
boxingRank Hierarchy level (1) Unit 0 ... 3
internalFormats Printer manages internal formats Checkmark set Checkbox
automaticMode When automatic mode is active, manualoperation of the device is not possible.
Checkmark set Checkbox
needDeviceFormat Determines whether the device is jointlyused in the line format.
Checkmark set Checkbox
showDeviceFrame Activates/deactivates the display of thedevice in the menu “overview”.
Checkmark set Checkbox
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged(TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
buffer Number of datasets to be buffered in theprinter. Some printers do not support abuffer and do not have this parameter.
2 Numeric
PLCName Name of the printer for the PLC - Drop-down list
printerMode See chapter [Printer Mode } Page 41]. AGGREGATE_PRINTER
Drop-down list
reprintMode Enabling/ disabling label reprint. It can bedefined in the device settings of the printeror in the line format. The reprint itselfoccurs only on the printers with enabledsetting.
ENABLED Drop-down list
ip IP address of the device Valid IP address
watchDogTime Time [ms] to ask for errors 15000 Numeric
labelPath Path on which the label inventory isstored for the printer.
- Valid Path
42 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
printCopy Only if printer mode isAGGREGATE_PRINTER: number ofidentical print outs to be triggered
1 Numeric
initScriptPath expert mode
remoteLabel If the option is activated, labels are loadedautomatically.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
CommandTimeOut Maximum waiting time (milliseconds) forresponse from the device after sending acommand (for example, reference code).
5000 Numeric
labelCharset expert mode UTF-8 Drop-down list
useFTP expert mode Checkmark not set Checkbox
ftpPort expert mode 21 Numeric
ftpUser expert mode none Alphanumeric
ftpPassword expert mode
ftpKeepAlive expert mode 0 Numeric
ftpPassiveMode expert mode Checkmark set Checkbox
ftpPSHardwareV2 expert mode Checkmark set Checkbox
FNC1BARCODE expert mode >8 Drop-down list
FNC1DATAMATRIX expert mode @1 Drop-down list
FNC1_GS expert mode @1 Drop-down list
remoteDefaultName Only if remoteLabel activated: name toload labels temporarily
PLM Alphanumeric
5.2.7.4 Integration of NiceLabel
OverviewNiceLabel is a label management software that offers centralized label design, storage including versioncontrol and approval workflow processes.NiceLabel Designer allows quickly creation of standard or custom label templates. With the additionalsoftware NiceLabel ControlCenter, you can also search, compare, report, share and analyse across theentire Electronic Label Catalogue.NiceLabel Automation Enterprise enables you to automate print tasks depending on special events. Theinterface between PLM and NiceLabel is a PLM module for NiceLabel. For each physical printer you want toprint NiceLabel layouts with, a NL Automation configuration is needed to control this printer with the NLAutomation Manager.
Precondition• The Enterprise editions of Automation and NL Control Center are installed.
The NiceLabel Pro editions are not sufficient. All references in this document relate to version NiceLabel2017.
• The NiceLabel Automation interface is configured.PLM is distributed with a reference configuration of NL Automation (zebra-bi.misx).
• A Zebra printer is used, controlled by the NiceLabel Windows driver.
ProcedureTo use a NiceLabel printer in PLM, proceed as follows:1. Create a new device.2. Enter a device name.
3. In the list Class name: select the entry 'NLA_basic'.
4. Click OK.
5. Open the device settings.6. Select the newly created device.7. Define the settings.
See table below.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 43 / 274
8. Click Save.
9. Repeat steps 1 to 8 for every NL Automation configuration with a different printing task.Each configuration has to be connected via its own NLA_basic device. Using the same printer acrossdifferent ranks is supported by using the same ‘port’ for printing.
10. Open the Production settings.
11. Click Add/Edit<BN>line format.12. Add a new line format.
13. Click Save.
14. Click Devices.
15. Select the device with NiceLabel settings.16. Activate the device.
17. Click load formats.
Depending on the folder defined in the label path in the device settings, the line formats found arelisted. See section [Working with Label Paths].
18. Select a line format from the list.
19. Click load fields.
20. Select the information to be displayed in the label.
21. Click Save.
22. Proceed with your normal production workflow.
Working with Label PathsIn the settings of the NiceLabel device you can define two options on how the NiceLabel interface isproviding the labels:• 'localLabelPath:'
When you enter a local path, the PLM module function load formats shows the labels in this folder. Youcan select one label to define a line format. The folder is accessed from both, the PLM module and theNL Automation configuration.
• 'webdavLabelPath:'You can configure the driver to copy labels from the NL Control Center folder into the local "labelPath"folder. The copy process is initiated when you click on load fields. You have to specify the 'webdavLa-belPath', the NL Control Center credentials 'CC_user' and 'CC_passwd'. A click on load formats willshow the versioned labels in the specified NL Control Center folder regardless if approved or not in theworkflow process. If the device option 'onlyApproved' is activated, only approved labels are shown anddownloaded.Labels are downloaded when a new order is started. In the labels folder a subfolder is created, which isassigned to this order. In this way it is assured, that after an order restart the same label versions areused. The subfolder is removed when the order is finished. For each download the label version islogged in the audit trail. Attention: The subfolder is not removed, when you reset the order. Delete thesubfolder manually.If the PLM module is in the 'webdavLabelPath:' mode, but the connection to NL Control Center fails, PLMwill check for local formats. Attention: Local formats may not contain the latest version.
NL Device SettingsWhen you create a device with the Class name: 'NLA_basic', in the device settings there are the followingparameters:
Parameter Description Default value Allowedvalues
Name Name that has been assigned inthe device management settings
- Alphanumeric
Description Optional description - Alphanumeric
boxingRank Hierarchy level (0) Global Drop-down list
InternalFormats NL Automation manages internalformats
Checkmark set Checkbox
44 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
automaticMode When automatic mode is active,manual operation of the device isnot possible.
Checkmark set Checkbox
needDeviceFormat Device appears on the line format.Printed status
checkmark set Checkbox
showDeviceFrame Currently not used. checkmark set Checkbox
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged(TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
buffer Only in BUFFERED_PRINTER mode:During production start the driver isproviding buffer data records.
1 Numeric
PLCName Name of the printer for the PLC - Drop-down list
printerMode Configures the printer, see chapter"Printers > Printer Mode"
BUFFERED_PRINTER Drop-down list
ip IP address of NL Automationservice (typically locally runningon the IPC)
127.0.0.1 Valid IPaddress
port Port number for accessing thetrigger of the NL Automation servicefor printing.
56423 Numeric
localLabelPath Local label path for storing labelsfiles on PLM
C:\Users\PCE Pilot\Documents\NiceLabel\Labels
Valid path
webdavLabelPath WebDav URL .If empty or startingwith #, no NL Control Centeraccess.
- Valid WebDAVURL or emptyor starting with#
CC_User NL Control Center user name <…> credential
CC_passwd NL Control Center password <…> Credential
msgOver Character string indicating the endof a message. Must not becontained in the contents data!
# CharacterString withmaximumlength 254
rspTimeout The NL Automation serviceconfirms any request. AfterrspTimeout ms the driver statesa connection error, if no confir-mation received.
50 Numeric
statusPattern Regular Expression to extractprinter and NL Automation statusinformation in the print confirmmessage.
status='(.*?)':(.*) Regularexpressionwith two ( )-groups orempty
printConfirm NL Automation variable name,used for the response address,where the NL Automation service isdirecting print confirm messages.
printConfirmAddr Alphanumeric
printerMode Configures the printer, see chapter"Printers > Printer Mode"
BUFFERED_PRINTER Drop-down list
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 45 / 274
selfTriggerDelay[ms] Only in BUFFERED_PRINTER mode:If non-negative, selfTrig-gerDelay ms after receiving aprint confirm message the driversends new data to the NLAutomation service. Otherwise thedriver has to be triggered fromextern.
-1 Numeric
labelInfoPort Port, the LabelInfo trigger islistening. Used to extract the printvariables from the labelfile.
56424 Numeric
onlyApproved Only approved labels are fetchedfrom NL Control Center.
Checkmark set Checkbox
Further informationFor further information on the NiceLabel software see additional documentation of the manufacturer:• "NiceLabel Automation Unleashed" by Aleš Primožič• NiceLabel Control Center Installation Guide• NiceLabel Control Center User Guide• NiceLabel Designer Pro User Guide
46 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
5.2.8 CamerasCameras of PCE are the Smart Camera (SMC) and the High Resolution Camera (HRC). These can fulfilldifferent functions depending on the corresponding settings.
5.2.8.1 Reader Modes
At this table the parameter 'readerMode' is described. This table is valid for hand scanners equally if themode is available.
Mode Function Explanation DevicePRINT_INSPECTION Reads and checks static or serialized
labels and its print quality if good or bad.Print inspection reader statistics are rankrelated.
The standard settingfor most readers.
SMC, VGL, handscanner (single itemreader)
STATIC_INSPECTION Reads and checks static (non serialized)labels and its print quality if good or bad.
Default setting forgeneric nonserialized reader onglobal rank (rank0).Static inspectionshould be used fornon-item relatedlabel inspection.Reader statistic doesnot influenceserialized labeldatabase status.
HRC, SMC, VGL,hand scanner(single and multipleitem reader
STATIC_INS_BUFFER Static rank related inspection mode. Filldevice SN store
Used when readerread static data butprinter should printSGTIN or SSCC.
HRC, SMC, VGL,hand scanner(single and multipleitem reader
PRINT_COMPARE Previously printed units are furtherprocessed. Camera only reads thenumbers and sends it to the PLM. SNverification is done by PLM instead ofcamera.
Already producedproducts are put inagain without beingprinted before.
SMC, VGL, Scanner(single item reader)
AGGREGATE_READER
Reads several child unit labels one byone or at once and sends codes to PLM,verifies content size.
Standard setting forreaders with rank >1
HRC, SMC, VGL,hand scanner(single and multipleitem reader)
LINKING_READER Reads and checks serialized helpercodelabels and its print quality if good or bad.
Default setting forhelpercodescenario.
SMC, VGL, handscanner (single itemreader)
HC_INSPECTION Reads and checks serialized helpercodelabels and its print quality if good or bad.
SMC, VGL, handscanner (single itemreader)
HC_LINK_READER Reads and checks serialized helpercodelabels and its print quality if good or bad.Only in combination withSERIAL_LINK_READER.
SMC, VGL, handscanner (single itemreader)
HC_AGGREGATE_READER
Reads several child unit helpercode labelsone by one or at once and sends codes toPLM, verifies content size.
HRC, SMC, VGL,hand scanner(single and multipleitem reader)
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 47 / 274
Mode Function Explanation DeviceSERIAL_LINK_READER
Reads and checks serialized labels andits print quality if good or bad. Process islinking between current read code andhelpercode label read before byHC_LINK_READER.
For example, this ishelpful when youchange the outerpackaging and theexisting codes canno longer be read.Then you can printhelpercodes on theunits, linked to theoriginal code, torecognize theoriginal code at thedatabase. Precon-dition: a secondreader must be setto the same rank anhas to be inHC_LINK_READER.mode, which checksthe PCE-helpercodelabel.
SMC, VGL, handscanner (single itemreader)
AGG_INSPECTION Verifies the last processed aggregation bychecking if an items is at an assumedposition inside of a case.
At a case packer aHRC or SMC areused as aggregateinspection reader.This reader checks ifa unit is at theexpected position.E.g. the last unit isat the lower right ofthe case. If that istrue this affirms thatall units must bealso right.
HRC, SMC, VGL,hand scanner(single item reader)
AGG_DELAY_PRINT All children of a parent unit areaggregated.The parent label will not be printed untilone child serial number is read by theAGG_DELAY_PRINT.
This mode can beused to label a unitwith delay.
SMC, VGL (Singleitem reader)
HC_AGG_DELAY_PRINT
All children of a parent unit areaggregated.The parent label will not be printed untilone child helper code is read by theHC_AGG_DELAY_PRINT.
This mode can beused to label a unitwith delay.
SMC, VGL, handscanner (single itemreader)
COPY_READER Reads and checks serialized labels andits print quality if good or bad. Sends readserial number to a connected printer withprinter mode: COPY_PRINTER.
Used for sendingunknown serialnumbers to aconnected printerwithout buffering. Aread code will beprinted immediately.
SMC, VGL, handscanner (single itemreader)
48 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Mode Function Explanation DeviceDISTRI-BUTION_READER
Compareable to COPY_READER but withinternal buffering. This function is used forlines with reading of several labels at oneitem (e.g. helpercode) in same rank. Itmakes sense to use it if there are manyitems between camera and printer.
Aim of this function: Avoiding waste of items when machinestops. All items between printer andcamera can be avoided to be discarded.
How it works:CAM1 (DISTRIBUTION_READER) reads allelements of the code (e.g. GTIN, expiry,serial number). The elements are verified(with the exception of the serial number).The serial number is only checked forattendance (by checking the length). Thenthe serial number is sent to CAM2(DISTRIBUTION_CONSUMER). CAM2checks the serial number received fromCAM1 and sets the status to ‘verified’.Problem: When both cameras would be inREADER_MODE, the shift register wouldstart at the printer. In case of an error allitems from printer till CAM2 would have tobe replaced.Solution:When CAM1 gets the serial numbers fromCAM2 and not from the printer, thesequence of items between printer andCAM1 can be changed. So the shiftregister starts at CAM1. Thus in case of amachine stop, only the items betweenCAM1 and CAM2 have to be discarded.
SMC, VGL, handscanner (single itemreader)
DISTRI-BUTION_CONSUMER
see DISTRIBUTION_READER SMC, VGL, handscanner (single itemreader)
AGG_PRINT_INPECTION
Print Inspection Mode and AggregationReader
readers
PARITY_READER Compares two or more equal pre-printedexternal serials
Two or more parityreader check foridentical serials ona single unit. Usedfor china codewithout PLM printedhelpercodes.
All readers
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 49 / 274
Mode Function Explanation DeviceLINEFORMAT LINEFORMAT is no reader mode. It is a
switch to move the reader mode configu-ration from the global device setting to theline format.Setting LINEFORMAT as reader mode inthe device settings (System settings> Edit device settings >reader Mode) allows to define thereader mode per line format.
The reader modesettings from theselected line formatare used. Readermode settings haveto be made in thedevice details of theline format and arestored there.
All readers
ABS_AGG_READER ABS enhanced aggregation reader mode
ABS_HC_AGG_READER
ABS enhanced helpercode aggregationreader mode
Serial-ization_Inspection
Reads and checks static or serializedlabels and its print quality if good or bad.Results are not committed to thedatabase.
Works as readermodePRINT_INSPECTIONbut withoutcommitting resultsto a database.Should be used onlines without aggre-gation bySecurePharmproduction. Also canbe used on lineswith labelers, whensecond camera isinstalled to checklabel present onproduct (lastcamera should runinPRINT_INSPECTIONmode and commitunit to database)
50 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Mode Function Explanation DeviceBULK_PRINT_INSPECTION
Enables bulk verification of child unitswithout aggregation
As soon as PLMreceives the readstatistics, thecontent is validatedand analyzed forduplicates. Ifduplicates arediscovered, awarning is shownand the duplicatesare removed fromthe collection ofread units. There iscurrently noanalysis regardingcontent sizevalidation.All non-verified readunits are verified,already verified unitsare skipped. Aftersuccessful verifi-cation, the newlabel with a realcontent size(duplicatesexcluded) is sent tothe buffered printeron the rank of theHRC, if no camerain PRINTINSPECTION modeexists on the samerank.
HRC(PCE_HRC_LANdriver)
5.2.8.2 Smart Camera
The Smart Camera reads barcodes, data matrix codes and human readable text and compares it with thedata received from the PLM. When the data is valid, the item is further processed. If data is invalid, the itemwill be discarded.When creating the Smart Camera as a device in PLM, you can choose between two different class names:• PCE_SMC• PCE_SMC_PRC
The class has the additional parameter 'CommandTimeOut'.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 51 / 274
The Smart Camera is editable under System Settings > Edit Device Settings > (<select SmartCamera tab>). At the tab menu on the top you can switch between the screens.
System Settings > Edit device settings > (<select smart camera tab>)
Edit the settings at the input fields and dropdown lists.The table below gives an overview of these settings:
Parameter Description Default value Allowed valuesName Name that has been assigned in the
device management settings.Camera Alphanumeric
Description Optional description - Alphanumeric
boxingRank Hierarchy level (1) Unit Drop-down list
internalFormats Camera manages internal formats Chechmark set Checkbox
automaticMode When automatic mode is active, manualoperation of the device is not possible.
Checkmark set Checkbox
needDeviceFormat Device appears on the line format Checkmark set Checkbox
showDeviceFrame Activates/deactivates the display of thedevice in the menu “overview”.
Checkmark set Checkbox
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged(TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
PLCName Name of the camera for the PLC Cam1 Drop-down list
readerMode PRINT_INSPECTIONAGGREGATE_READERLINKING_READERAGG_INSPECTIONLINEFORMAT
PRINT_INSPECTION Drop-down list
autoVerifyAggUnit Possibility of combining with one readingprocess the verification and commissioninto the database.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
preAggregation-Reject
Units scanned by aggregation reader arevalidated direct after read and rejected byPLC. Default the validation process startswith the covering box close signal(content size is reached or close button)
Checkmark not set Checkbox
autoReject Relevant for aggregation modes only withactivated setting "autoVerifyAggUnit". Ifenabled, the units are not added to aggre-gation cache if the reading was bad/incomplete. There is no UI notification inthis case.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
52 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
forceAggCache The parameter is relevant only for aggre-gation reader modes with enableddelayed aggregation where the aggre-gation cache is closed only after "aggre-gationReady" signal from PLC. If enabled,any bad/incomplete/good reading will bepushed into the delayed aggregationqueue and must be consumed by anexternal aggregation ready/abort signal.Otherwise only good reading isconsumed.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
useWildcards Activates/deactivates the transfer of theserial number through a placeholder(*****) it is only checked for length, notfor contents.
Checkmark set Checkbox
ConnectGui Activates/deactivates the imageprocessing on the camera
Checkmark set Checkbox
ip IP address of the device 192.168.100.215 Valid IP address
errorImages Activates/deactivates the permanentstorage of SMC error images in the PCELine Manager database.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
debugStatistics Stores communication between the PCELine Manager and the camera in txt data.Only for error searches, otherwise thisshould be switched off.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
CommandTimeOut Maximum waiting time (milliseconds) forresponse from the device after sending acommand (for example, reference code).
5000 Alphanumeric
5.2.8.3 Aggregation with Smart Camera
Aggregation of items to a case can also be done via Smart Camera. This feature will only be implementedfor the latest Smart Camera generation (150, 205, 206, 215). To achieve this, the camera uses its subsetand set to store serial numbers temporarily. The aim is to send the complete set of serial numbers to thePLM only after the case was closed, while filling a new case in the meantime.
How it worksThe aggregation process via Smart Camera is described in the Flowchart below.
Parameter Actions by SMC Processing in SMC and PLM Filling Case (A) Capturing Items (for
Case A)Save SNs to Subset
Case A filled - Transfer SNs from Subset to Set
Filling new case (B) Capturing Items (forCase B)
Save SNs to Subset
Case (A) complete - Transfer SNs from Set to PLM, check and Aggregate SNs
Keep on filling newcase (B)
Capturing Items (forCase B)
Save SNs to Subset…
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 53 / 274
PLC
exte
rn
MS
CP
LMP
LC -
PC
E
Ca
se L
ab
el
Pri
nte
r
Filling case (A)
Su
bse
tS
et
Filling new case (B)Case (A)
complete
Keep on filling
new case (B)Case (A)
filled
Aggregation with Smart Camera
54 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
5.2.8.4 Setting up a Product in SMC
This chapter describes how to set up a product in the Smart Camera. Some step sequences have to berepeated in order to set several fields. For this the steps are numbered.
Step Action1 Press Home.
Home
Step Action2 Select the camera bar.
The following screen appears (It may be that the software automatically skips this screen. In this case youdo not need to press menu at this point and you see the subsequent screen):
Home > (<select smart camera bar>)
Step Action3 Press Menu.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 55 / 274
The following screen appears:
Home > (<select smart camera bar>) > Menu
Step Action4 Press Product management.
The following screen appears:
Home > (<select smart camera bar>) > Menu > Product management
Step Action5 Press New product.
56 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
The following dialog (New product name) appears:
Home > (<select smart camera bar>) > Menu > Product management > New product
Step Action6 Enter a unique product name.
7 Press Enter on the keyboard.
The following dialog (Live image) appears:
Home > (<select smart camera bar>) > Menu > Product management > New product > (enter product name) > Enter(at the keyboard)
Step Action8 Select live Image.
9 Place item underneath the Smart Camera.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 57 / 274
The following screen appears:
Home > (<select smart camera bar>) > Menu > Product management > New product > (enter product name) > Enter(at the keyboard) > Live Image
Step Action10 Select Next.
The following dialog (Control) appears:
Home > (<select smart camera bar>) > Menu > Product management > New product > (enter product name) > Enter(at the keyboard) > Live Image > Next
Step Action11 Press OCV control.
58 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
The screen looks as follows:
Home > (<select smart camera bar>) > Menu > Product management > New product > (enter product name) > Enter(at the keyboard) > Live Image > Next > OCV control
To set the control window for the expiry date proceed as follows.
Step Action12 Move the yellow control window in a way that it is arranged around the expiry date. See below.
To set the control window you can use the navigation arrow keys as described in the following table. Youcan also move the control window and adjust its borders by dragging and dropping the borders.
Button FunctionNavigation arrow keys for functions at the modes. The mode isselected at the button in the middle.
Button Mode
‘scrolling’ The control window can be moved using the arrow keys.
‘zoom in’ The control window can be enlarged using the arrow keys.
‘zoom out’ The control window can be reduced using the arrow keys.
Step Action13 After the control window is set to the right position, press OK to confirm.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 59 / 274
The following Dialog (Threshold) appears:
Home > (<select smart camera bar>) > Menu > Product management > New product > (enter product name) > Enter(at the keyboard) > Live Image > Next > OCV control (arrange control window) > OK (set threshold)
Step Action14 Move threshold in a way until you can clearly read the font.
15 Then press OK to confirm.
The following dialog (Window with measuring arrows?) appears:
Home > (<select smart camera bar>) > Menu > Product management > New product > (enter product name) > Enter(at the keyboard) > Live Image > Next > OCV control (arrange control window) > OK (set threshold) > OK
Step Action 16 Select Yes.
60 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
After pressing Yes, the following dialog (Font Memory) appears:
Home > (<select smart camera bar>) > Menu > Product management > New product > (enter product name) > Enter(at the keyboard) > Live Image > Next > OCV control (arrange control window) > OK
At this dialog you have to choose the font memory you would like to use.
Step Action17 Select ocrb.
The following dialog (Prepare another control?) appears:
Home > (<select smart camera bar>) > Menu > Product management > New product > (enter product name) > Enter(at the keyboard) > Live Image > Next > OCV control (arrange control window) > OK (set threshold) > OK > Yes(select font memory)
To set another control window for the <LOT> field you have to repeat the steps (11-15).
Step Action18 PressYes. (You are automatically led back to proceed from step 11)
19 Repeat steps 11–15
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 61 / 274
Home > (<select smart camera bar>) > Menu > Product management > New product > (enter product name) > Enter(at the keyboard) > Live Image > Next > OCV control (arrange control window) > OK (set threshold) > OK > Yes(select font memory)
Step Action20 Select No.
The following screen appears:
Home > (<select smart camera bar>) > Menu > Product management > New product > (enter product name) > Enter(at the keyboard) > Live Image > Next > OCV control (arrange control window) > OK (set threshold) > OK > Yes(select font memory) > No
At this screen you see the calculated position of measurement lines.
Step Action21 Press Next to leave the screen.
62 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
After pressing next you get to the following screen:
Home > (<select smart camera bar>) > Menu > Product management > New product > (enter product name) > Enter(at the keyboard) > Live Image > Next > OCV control (arrange control window) > OK (set threshold) > OK > Yes(select font memory) > No > Next
You can return to production or add a new control window. To add another control window press Addcontrol window. You will be redirected to step 11. To return to production close the Product managementdialog by pressing x and press Production at the Main Menu dialog.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 63 / 274
5.2.8.5 High Resolution Camera (PCE_HRC)
The HRC is editable under System Settings > Edit Device Settings > (select <HRC tab>) .
System Settings > Edit device settings > (select <megapixel camera tab>).
Parameter Description Default value Allowed valuesName Name that has been assigned in the
device management settingsHRC Alphanumeric
Description Optional description - Alphanumeric
boxingRank Hierarchy level (2) Bundle Drop-down list
internal Formats Camera manages internal formats Checkmark set Checkbox
automaticMode When automatic mode is active, manualoperation of the device is not possible.
Checkmark set Checkbox
needDeviceFormat Determines whether the device is jointlyused in the line format.
Checkmark set Checkbox
showDeviceFrame Activates/deactivates the display of thedevice in the menu “overview”.
Checkmark set Checkbox
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged(TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
PLCName Select suitable value - Drop-down list
readerMode PRINT_INSPECTION /AGGREGATE_READER /LINKING_READER / AGG_INSPECTION /LINEFORMATSee “Smart Camera”
AGGRAGATE_READER
Drop-down list
autoVerifyAggUnit Possibility of combining with one readingprocess the verification and commissioninto the database.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
preAggregation-Reject
Units scanned by aggregation reader arevalidated direct after read and rejected byPLC. Default the validation process startswith the covering box close signal(content size is reached or close button)
Checkmark not set Checkbox
autoReject If enabled, non-verified aggregationproducts are automatically rejected.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
forceAggCache Checkmark not set Checkbox
useWildcards If enabled, the camera checks only forvalid length.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
comPort Sets the COM Port to that to which thecamera is connected.
COM2 Drop-down list
64 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
baudRate Baud rate between Camera and IPC 57600 Drop-down list
image Port for TCPIP connection 50000 Numeric
ConnWatchDogTO Customizable time WatchDog [ms] 10000 Numeric
layerSizeEnable Checkmark set Checkbox
debugMode Checkmark not set Checkbox
comDriver RXTX Drop-down list
5.2.8.6 High Resolution Camera LAN (PCE_HRC_LAN)
The HRC LAN is editable under System Settings > Edit Device Settings > (select <HRC LANtab>). At the tab menu on the top you can switch between the screens.
System Settings > Edit device settings > (select <megapixel camera tab>).
Edit the settings at the input fields and scroll down menus. The table below gives an overview of thesefunctions:
Parameter Description Default value Allowed valuesName Name that has been assigned in the
device management settingsHRC Alphanumeric
Description Optional description - Alphanumeric
boxingRank Hierarchy level (2) Bundle Drop-down list
internal Formats Camera manages internal formats Checkmark set Checkbox
automaticMode When automatic mode is active, manualoperation of the device is not possible.
Checkmark set Checkbox
needDeviceFormat Determines whether the device is jointlyused in the line format.
Checkmark set Checkbox
showDeviceFrame Activates/deactivates the display of thedevice in the menu “overview”.
Checkmark set Checkbox
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged(TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
PLCName Select suitable value - Drop-down list
readerMode PRINT_INSPECTION /AGGREGATE_READER /LINKING_READER / AGG_INSPECTION /LINEFORMATSee “Smart Camera”
AGGRAGATE_READER
Drop-down list
autoVerifyAggUnit Possibility of combining with one readingprocess the verification and commissioninto the database.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 65 / 274
preAggregation-Reject
Units scanned by aggregation reader arevalidated direct after read and rejected byPLC. Default the validation process startswith the covering box close signal(content size is reached or close button)
Checkmark not set Checkbox
autoReject If enabled, non-verified aggregationproducts are automatically rejected.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
forceAggCache Checkmark not set Checkbox
useWildcards If enabled, the camera checks only forvalid length.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
connect GUI Legacy parameter. It was used for cameracommunication. Will be removed in afuture version.
Checkmark set Checkbox
ip IP address of the device - Numeric
port 0 Numeric
image Port for TCPIP connection 49000 Numeric
watchDogEnable Checkmark set Checkbox
vncEnable Checkmark not set Checkbox
vncPort 5900 Numeric
vncPassword pce Alphanumeric
InspectionOnly Checkmark set Checkbox
5.2.8.7 High Resolution Camera (PCE_HRC_VDMAXML)
The HRC VDMAXML is editable under System Settings > Edit Device Settings > (select <HRC tab>).
System Settings > Edit device settings > (select <megapixel camera tab>).
Parameter Description Default value Allowed valuesName Name that has been assigned in the
device management settingsHRC Alphanumeric
Description Optional description - Alphanumeric
boxingRank Hierarchy level (2) Bundle Drop-down list
internal Formats Camera manages internal formats Checkmark set Checkbox
automaticMode When automatic mode is active, manualoperation of the device is not possible.
Checkmark set Checkbox
needDeviceFormat Determines whether the device is jointlyused in the line format.
Checkmark set Checkbox
showDeviceFrame Activates/deactivates the display of thedevice in the menu “overview”.
Checkmark set Checkbox
66 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged(TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
PLCName Select suitable value - Drop-down list
readerMode PRINT_INSPECTION /AGGREGATE_READER /LINKING_READER / AGG_INSPECTION /LINEFORMATSee “Smart Camera”
AGGRAGATE_READER
Drop-down list
autoVerifyAggUnit Possibility of combining with one readingprocess the verification and commissioninto the database.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
preAggregation-Reject
Units scanned by aggregation reader arevalidated direct after read and rejected byPLC. Default the validation process startswith the covering box close signal(content size is reached or close button)
Checkmark not set Checkbox
autoReject If enabled, non-verified aggregationproducts are automatically rejected.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
forceAggCache Checkmark not set Checkbox
connectGui Legacy parameter. It was used for cameracommunication. Will be removed in afuture version.
Checkmark set Checkbox
ip IP address of the device. - Numeric
debugStatistics If enabled, statistics are logged. Checkmark not set Checkbox
CommandTimeOut Time to wait for replies in device commu-nication before connection is consideredinterrupted.
5000 Numeric
5.2.9 Use cases for Printer/Reader Modes with China Coding
Printer A Serial Number
Printer B Helper Code
Reader A1 Serial Number
Reader B1 Helper Code
Reader A2 Serial Number
ReaderB2 HelperCode
Use case 1 Printer B prints helper codes (HC), reader A2 reads external pre-printed china serial (SN)and Reader B2 link PLM generated HC with china serial. Both readers must be triggered forall units and reader B2 trigger generate new HC into printer B buffer. Position and ordersequence of reader A2 and B2 is flexible. Good/bad IO signal of reader A2 and B2 aremerged to eject after last reader position.
mode HC_PRINTER
LINKING_READER
LINKING_READER
readOnly yes no
lineformat(SN mapping)
R21 21 R21
Use case 2 Reader A2 reads external pre-printed china serial (SN) and reader B2 link externalgenerated HC with china serial. Both readers must be triggered for all units. Position andorder sequence of reader A2 and B2 is flexible. Good/bad IO signal of reader A2 and B2are merged to eject after last reader position.
mode LINKING_READER
LINKING_READER
readOnly yes yes
lineformat(SN mapping)
21 R21
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 67 / 274
Use case 3 Printer B prints helper codes (HC), reader A2 reads external pre-printed china serial (SN)and reader B2 link PLM generated HC with china serial. Reader A2 and B2 must besynchronized triggered for all units and reader B1 trigger generate new HC into printer Bbuffer. Position and order sequence of reader A2 and B2 is flexible. Good/bad IO Signal ofreader A2 and B2 are merged to eject after last reader position.
mode HC_PRINTER
HC_INSPECTION
LINKING_READER
LINKING_READER
readOnly no yes yes
lineformat(SN mapping)
R21 R21 21 R21
Use case 4 Printer A prints china serials, printer B prints helper codes (HC), reader A2 reads internalchina serial (SN) and reader B2 link PLM generated HC with PLM china serial. Bothreaders must be triggered for all units and reader B2 trigger generate new HC into printer Bbuffer and also generate new serials into printer A buffer. Position and order sequence ofreader A2 and B2 is flexible. Good/bad IO signal of reader A2 and B2 are merged to ejectafter last reader position.
mode BUFFERED_PRINTER
HC_PRINTER
LINKING_READER
LINKING_READER
readOnly no no
lineformat(SN mapping)
21 21 21 R21
Use case 5 Printer A prints china serials, printer B prints helper codes (HC), reader A2 reads internalchina serial (SN) and reader B2 link PLM generated HC with PLM china serial. Bothreaders must be triggered for all units and reader B1 trigger generate new HC into printer Bbuffer and reader A1 generate new serials into printer A buffer. Position and ordersequence of reader A2 and B2 is flexible. Good/bad IO signal of reader A2 and B2 aremerged to eject after last reader position.
mode BUFFERED_PRINTER
HC_PRINTER
PRINT_INSPECTION
HC_INSPECTION
LINKING_READER
LINKING_READER
readOnly no no no no
lineformat(SN mapping)
21 R21 21 R21 21 R21
68 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
5.2.10 Hand ScannerThe hand scanner is editable under System Settings > Edit Device Settings > (Select <handscanner tab>). At the tab menu on the top you can switch between the screens.
System Settings > Edit device settings > (Select <hand scanner tab>)
Parameter Description Default value Allowed valuesName Name that has been assigned in the
device management settings- Alphanumeric
Description Optional description - Alphanumeric
boxingRank Hierarchy level (0) Global Drop-down list
automaticMode When automatic mode is active, manualoperation of the device is not possible.
Checkmark set Checkbox
needDeviceFormat At the moment without any meaning Checkmark not set Checkbox
showDeviceFrame Activates/deactivates the display of thedevice in the menu “overview”.
Checkmark set Checkbox
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged(TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
PLCName - Drop-down list
readerMode PRINT_INSPECTIONAGGREGATE_READERLINKING_READERAGG_INSPECTIONLINEFORMATSee “Smart Camera”
PRINT_INSPECTION Drop-down list
autoVerifyAggUnit Possibility of combining with one readingprocess the verification and commissioninto the database.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 69 / 274
preAggregation-Reject
Units scanned by aggregation reader arevalidated direct after read and rejected byPLC. Default the validation process startswith the covering box close signal(content size is reached or close button)
Checkmark not set Checkbox
autoReject If enabled, non-verified aggregationproducts are automatically rejected.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
forceAggCache Checkmark not set Checkbox
comPort Describes the COM Port the Scanner isconnected to.
COM2 Drop-down list
commandTimeout After this time [s] the scanner resets theactual command
30 Numeric
debugMode Possibility of blending in/out the button„Debug Console“. The Debug surfaceenables analysis of read-in codes.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
disableOnLogoff If enabled, scanner events are ignored ifno user is logged in.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
plcHardwareIO If enabled, read events are sent to thePLC.
baudRate Baud Rate between Scanner and IPC 38400 Drop-down list
70 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
5.2.11 CheckweigherThe checkweigher is editable under System Settings > Edit device settings > (Select<checkweigher tab>). At the tab menu on the top you can switch between the screens.
System Settings > Edit device settings > (select <checkweigher tab>)
Edit the settings at the input fields and scroll down menus. The table below gives an overview of thesefunctions:
Parameter Description Default value Allowed valuesDescription Optional description - Alphanumeric
UseArticleID Information about usage of article ID orarticle name in line format
Checkmark not set Checkbox
automaticMode Must always be set (checkmark). Checkmark set Checkbox
boxingRank Hierarchy level (0) Global Drop-down list
errorPort Connection to error report service 55200 Numeric
InternalFormats The scanner uses internal formats Checkmark not set Checkbox
ip Checkweigher IP address - Valid IP address
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged(TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
NeedDeviceFormat Use of line format in case of checkmark Checkmark set Checkbox
port XML port for communication 55100 Numeric
vncEnable With HC checkweigher always off, withHC Avantgarde checkweigher always on
- Checkbox
vncPassword Password for HC Avantgarde check-weigher
- Alphanumeric
vncPort Standard port for VNC connection 5900 Numeric
showDeviceFrame Activates/deactivates the display of thedevice in the menu “overview”.
Checkmark set Checkbox
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 71 / 274
5.2.12 UPSThe UPS is editable under System Settings > Edit device settings > (Select <UPStab>). At the tab menu on the top you can switch between the screens.
System Settings > Edit device settings > (Select <UPS tab>)
Edit the settings at the input fields and scroll down menus. The table below gives an overview of thesefunctions:
Parameter Description Default value Allowed valuesName Name that has been assigned in the
device management settings- Alphanumeric
Description Optional description - Alphanumeric
boxing Rank Hierarchy level (rank) (0) Global Drop-down list
comPort Describes the COM Port the device isconnected to.(COM1 … COM30/USB)
- Drop-down list
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged(TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
shutDown Determines whether the PC needs to beshut down in case of power failure.
Checkmark set Checkbox
showDeviceFrame Activates/deactivates the display of thedevice in the menu “overview”.
Checkmark set Checkbox
72 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
5.2.13 Comparator VGL7/VGL8The UPS is editable under System Settings > Edit device settings > (select<Comparator VGL7/VGL8> tab). At the tab menu on the top you can switch between the screens.
System Settings > Edit device settings > (select Comparator VGL7/VGL8 tab)
Edit the settings at the input fields and scroll down menus. The table below gives an overview of thesefunctions:
Parameter Description Default value Allowed valuesDescription Optional description - Alphanumeric
PLCName Name of comparator for the PLC - Drop-down list
autoVerifyAggUnit Possibility of combining with one readingprocess the verification and commissioninto the database.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
automaticMode When automatic mode is active, manualoperation of the device is not possible.
Checkmark set Checkbox
boxingRank Hierarchy level (1) Unit Drop-down list
connectGui Connection between PCE Line Managerand comparer
Checkmark set Checkbox
ip IP address stored in comparator - Valid IP address
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged(TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
needDeviceFormat Determines whether the device is jointlyused in the line format.
Checkmark set Checkbox
readerMode PRINT_INSPECTION AGGREGATE_READERLINKING_READERAGG_INSPECTIONLINEFORMATSee “Smart Camera”
PRINT_INSPECTION Drop-down list
useWildcards Possibility of using Wildcards at input ofreference codes.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
showDeviceFrame Activates/deactivates the display of thedevice in the menu “overview”.
Checkmark set Checkbox
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 73 / 274
5.2.14 Garvens X-series weigherThe Garvens X-series weigher is editable under System Settings > Edit device settings >(Select < Garvens checkweigher tab>). At the tab menu on the top you can switch between thescreens.
Edit the settings at the input fields and scroll down menus. The table below gives an overview of thesefunctions:
Parameter Description Default value Allowed valuesDescription Optional description - Alphanumeric
PLCName Name of checkweigher for PLC - Drop-down list
automaticMode Must always be set (checkmark). Checkmark set Checkbox
boxingRank Hierarchy level (0) Global Drop-down list
connectGui Checkmark set Checkbox
InternalFormats The scanner uses internal formats Checkmark not set Checkbox
ip Checkweigher IP address - Valid IP address
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged(TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
NeedDeviceFormat Use of line format in case of checkmark Checkmark set Checkbox
port XML port for communication 55100 Numeric
readerMode
showDeviceFrame Activates/deactivates the display of thedevice in the menu “overview”.
Checkmark set Checkbox
useWildcards Possibility of using Wildcards at input ofreference codes.
Checkmark set Checkbox
watchDogEnable Possibility of using a watchdog Checkmark not set Checkbox
5.2.15 CentralWrapper moduleSee chapter [Central Wrapper } Page 92].
5.2.16 Palletizer_Extension moduleThe Palletizer module is intended to be used with certain packaging equipment like Pester. With this modulethe aggregation is controlled by a palletizer robot via the PLC. PLM is informed through the PLC if the caseis picked up by the machine or if the case is placed on the pallet.
5.2.16.1 Precondition
• A Siemens PLC S7-1200 is used.• The PLC is on the same rank as the Palletizer module.• The PLC software supports the workflow with equipment.
74 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
• The parameters CasePickedUp and CaseOnPallet are configured in the PLC table.
5.2.16.2 Creating the Palletizer_Extension module
1. Create a new device.2. Enter a device name.
3. In the list Class name: select the entry 'Palletizer_Extension'.
4. Click OK.
5. Open the device settings.6. Select the newly created device.7. Define the settings.
See table below.
8. Click Save.
Palletizer Device SettingsWhen you create a device with the Class name: 'Palletizer_Extension', in the device settings there are thefollowing parameters:
Parameter Description Default value Allowedvalues
Name Name that has been assigned inthe device management settings
- Alphanumeric
Description Optional description - Alphanumeric
boxingRank The aggregation level of palletizer. 4 Drop-down list
automaticMode When automatic mode is active,manual operation of the device isnot possible.
Checkmark set Checkbox
needDeviceFormat Device appears on the line format.Allows to activate the moduleseparately for each line format.PLM modules are automaticallystarted on the production start if thesetting 'needDeviceFormat' is notactivated or the setting 'needDe-viceFormat' is activated and themodule is activated in the lineformat.
Checkmark set Checkbox
showDeviceFrame Currently not used. Checkmark set Checkbox
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged(TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
PickedUpEnable Defines if the "Pick up" stateshould be processed in thePalletizer_Extenstion module. If notactivated, the "Pick up" state isignored.
Checkmark not set Checkbox
Decommission Currently not used. Checkmark not set Checkbox
5.2.16.3 Workflow
The Palletizer_Extension module is notified as soon as the aggregation camera reads a case. If the readingwas successful, the unit is stored in the palletizer queue ("second level" aggregation cache). The furtherworkflow is dependent on the external packaging robot that is able to send the following signals through thePLC:• "CasePickedUp"
As soon as the robot picks up the case read by the camera.• "CaseOnPallet"
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 75 / 274
As soon as the case is placed on the pallet by the robot.
State of CasesThe following table shows the state of cases in the palletizer cache and their reaction to the PLC signals:
Action Description StateCamera reading The case is stored in the palletizer cache. No new case can be read until
the robot processes the current one.READ
PLC"CasePickedUp"
The case state in the palletizer cache is changed: READ > PICKED UP. PICK UP
PLC "CaseOnPallet" The case state in the palletizer cache is changed: PICKED UP > ONPALLET. The case is sent to the PLM aggregation cache.The aggregation is closed automatically if the child amount is reached.
PALLET
The processed units and their states are available from the Home view, in the tab of the Palletizer_Extensionmodule:
76 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Workflow diagramsWorkflow with setting "pickedUpEnabled"
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 77 / 274
Workflow without setting "pickedUpEnabled"
5.2.17 PCE_REPORTERWith the device PCE_REPORTER, you can automatically export reports at the end of a production. Noadditional user interaction is necessary.
Parameter Description Default value Allowed valuesDescription Optional description - Alphanumeric
boxingRank Hierarchy level. Module rank (fixedglobal, rank 0).
(0) Global Drop-down list
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged(TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
78 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Report_Template ]This determines the report type, e.g. lineformat report, or order summary report. Inthis setting, the path to the report templatefile (a .rptdesign file) must be specified.[C:\pce\pilot\bin\pdf\summary_order\<name of template> (e.g.:order_report.design)
- Alphanumeric
renderFormat The format of the report to be generated,e.g. PDF or DOC
PDF Drop-down list
Export Directory Specifies the folder on the file systemwhere generated reports are saved.
order_export Alphanumeric
Report Name The file name for generated reports (withinthe folder specified in the Export Directorysetting).
_order_export Alphanumeric
The report type is determined by the module settings. The module works for the entire line, i.e. there is nosetting "Needs device format". Hence, it does not need integration in a specific line format. It is possible tocreate multiple PCE_REPORTER modules in order to create multiple reports.
5.2.18 PCE_DECOM_FINALIZERWith this device, all not commissioned (not validated or not aggregated) units up to the selected rank willbe decommissioned after the end of production. This is useful for making a clean export of an aggregationhierarchy into the ERP system, where orphaned units are not desired.This module works with the selected lineformat. As a result, there are only commissioned and decommis-sioned units at the end of a production and no units with commissioned orphans or any other status.If you use the Master/Slave functionality, you only have to create the module at the master.
Edit the settings at the input fields and scroll down menus. The table below gives an overview of thesefunctions:
Parameter Description Default value Allowed valuesName Name that has been assigned in the
device management settings- Alphanumeric
Description Optional description - Alphanumeric
boxingRank Hierarchy level (0) Global Drop-down list
InternalFormats The scanner uses internal formats Checkmark not set Checkbox
logLevel Setting of how much data is logged(TRACE/DEBUG/INFO/WARN/ERROR)
INFO Drop-down list
maxRank Units up to this rank will be decommis-sioned
4 Drop-down list
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 79 / 274
needDeviceFormat Device appears on the line format. Printedstatus.PLM modules are automatically started onthe production start if the setting 'needDe-viceFormat' is not activated or the setting'needDeviceFormat' is activated and themodule is activated in the line format.
checkmark set Checkbox
Line SettingsIf you do not activate the setting 'needDeviceFormat' in the device configuration, you configure the ranks onwhich orphaned items are decommissioned in the Line Setting 'DN01 Decommission not Agg. units onRank'.Example value: 1,2,3
Line FormatIf you activate the setting 'needDeviceFormat' in the device configuration, you activate the DecomissionFinalizer in the line format.
In the fields 'Decom.Orphan' you define for which ranks the decommissioning is activated. Allowed valuesfor activation are: 1, on, yes. Alle other values are considered as deactivation.
NOTICENo decommissioning on highest rankAlways deactivate the highest produced rank, like rank 4 (pallet). Otherwise the palletswill also be decommissioned.
Workflow• The module starts the decommissioning when the production ended, namely after you click the Finish
button.• Decommissioning is performed for all the units that are not aggregated and therefore have no parent.• Decommissioning includes also subsequent hierarchy. Cases are decommissioned together with their
items.• If the pallet rank 4 is not selected for decommissioning, the decommission of necessary pallets must be
performed manually via the global scanner hierarchy.
80 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
5.2.19 PCE_PARTIAL_UNIT moduleThe module allows automatic aggregation on partial units. It works together with the HRC. The module hasa simple UI with the button 'Partial Unit' that activates the 'partial aggregation' mode.
Configuration
Parameter Default value DescriptionboxingRank 3 Rank of the partial unit
Attached HRC HRC in aggregation mode should be selected
Show dialog selected Shows the dialog requesting the unit amount on the last layer. Ifthe dialog is not shown, all values read by the HRC areaccepted.
Supported hardwareHRC drivers supported:• PCE_HRC• PCE_HRC_LANReading mode:• AGGREGATE_READER• ABS_AGG_READER
Order configurationThe module is relevant only for aggregation workflows.The AI R36 (layer size) on the rank of partial unit is required.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 81 / 274
Workflow
* The PLC parameter "PartialUnit" is send if it is configured in the PLC settings.
If the dialog is disabled in the device settings, the content amount is not validated. The read amount(duplicates excluded) is accepted as is.
82 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
User Interface1 When production is running, select the module in the Home view. The module has a single "Partial
Case" button that is active on running production.
2 Before pressing the "Partial Case" button, you have to count the amount of items in the last layer. Thisamount has to be entered in the dialog later on.ð For a Case Packer you have to trigger the button before the last camera reading. After pressing the
button, the PLC Parameter "PartialUnit" is set to "1".ð For a SCS you can press the button any time before pressing the "Case Full" button.
3 If you click the button, the 'Partial unit' mode is activated and the next read content will be consumedalso if the rank size (AI 30) is not reached.
4 The "Case Full" signal is triggered and the read statistics are sent from the HRC to the PLM.ð For a Case Packer the last reading of the camera is triggered. "Case full" is triggered automatically
with the last reading.ð For a SCS the button "Case Full" has to be pressed manually.
5 Since the HRC reads the content of the previous layer together with the last one, the duplicates areexpected (the uncovered units from the previous layer are read twice). The warning "05650 Cannotaggregate SN: <serial number>. Double serial detected by reader: HRC" is shown.
6 After the PLM receives the result of the partial reading from the HRC, the dialog requesting the last layersize (amount of units in the last layer) is displayed. If the camera reads full content (amount the sameas rank size), the dialog is not displayed since the unit is not partial.
7 You should enter 0 if the last layer of the incomplete case is full. For example, the full case consists of50 units, layer size is 10, the partial case to aggregate is 40.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 83 / 274
NOTICEDon't risk timeout errorsThe last layer size should be entered immediately since the PLC is waiting for the "datavalid" response from the PLM and a timeout error can occur.
8 If you click OK, the expected partial content size is calculated based on the layer size in the order, thelast layer size from the dialog input, and the read amount. If you click Cancel, the expected size is thesame as the read amount.
9 If the read amount is the same as the expected partial content size, the read content is sent for aggre-gation and the aggregation is closed. The label is generated and printed as before. The 'Partial unit'mode is deactivated.
10 For the next partial unit, you have to activate the 'Partial unit' mode again by pressing the button.
5.2.20 PCE_PSM_EXPORTER moduleThe module is part of a functionality that exports verified units to an ERP system. It allows to perform theexport to ERP real-time, without waiting for order finalization. As soon as the unit (usually pallet) is verified,the Exporter informs the PSM that the unit is ready for export. PSM exports the unit to ERP and sets thestatus "sent" if it was successfully exported.
Configuration
Parameter Recommended Value DescriptionURL http:// [YOUR-HOST]:8080/[PSM-
CONTEXT-ROOT]/rest/orderunit-closed/close
URL to PSM Web Service thataccepts the ID of the closed unit(usually pallet) and sends the unitinformation to the ERP system.
Rank 4 Rank of the top-level aggregationunits that should be sent to theexternal ERP system.
Attempts 5 Maximum number of failed PSMnotifications for each unit. If thislimit is reached, the unit will not besend to the PSM again until thePLM is restarted.
NeedDeviceFormat Active Activates the exporter per lineformat
WorkflowThe Exporter is active only if the production is running and reacts to any commissioning or verification eventon the same rank. As soon as the unit is verified/commissioned, it is placed into the Exporter queue(cache).
NOTICENo export if production suspendedIf the unit is commissioned on a suspended production, it will no be processed by theExporter.
The further workflow is dependent on the Local Cache settings.
84 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Unit export without local cache:
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 85 / 274
Unit export in Local Cache:
The unit sending in Local Cache mode includes two stages:• Transfer of the unit, its hierarchy, and extensions to the global database.• PSM notification with the unit ID from the global database.
86 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
NOTICEUnit information in Local Cache not updatedPSM takes all information required for the export from the global database. If the transferto ERP was successful, the unit in the global DB is marked as "sent". The same unit inthe Local Cache is not updated.
Hierarchy ViewUnits exported to the global DB are marked on the hierarchy view with the arrow symbol:
On order finalization the units exported to the global DB are not transferred anymore.
Exporter QueueAll the units processed by the Exporter are stored in the Exporter cache which is available from the Homeview:
Possible states of the units in the Exporter:
Unit state DescriptionNOT SEND Unit is added to cache.
SEND PENDING Send is failed but the number of attempts didn'treach the limit yet.
SENT FAILED Send is failed and the number of attempts hasreached the limit.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 87 / 274
Unit state DescriptionDATABASE EXPORT FAILED Relevant only for Local Cache mode. The transfer
from Local Cache to the global database failed.
SENT Unit was successfully sent for processing in PSM.
The units with the state "SEND PENDING" are stored into the database (tbl_failedexportunits) on eachproduction stop or order finalisation or PLM shutdown. The processed unit and it's state are restored on theproduction start again.
5.2.21 SystemSettingsExtension moduleThe module allows to override system settings in the line format. It allows to manage the settings dynam-ically or to decide if the setting should be activated for a certain order.
Currently supported settings:LC01 (local cache mode)
ConfigurationThe device SystemSettingsExtensions has to be created. No device settings are required. Then you have toactivate the device in the line format. See chapter [Device Settings at Line Format - SystemSettingsExtensionmodule } Page 115].
5.3 Configuring IP AddressesThis chapter describes the allocation of IP addresses to stations and devices for communication betweendevices and the PLM. All operating systems (DMS, ABS, SCS, and MAS if available) need an own IPaddress at the line. Also all the following devices need an IP address:• Printers• Cameras• Hand Scanner• Checkweigher• UPS• Comparator VGL7/VGL8• PLC• Com Interfaces• Servers
First you have to allocate the IP addresses at every operating system of the station PCs and afterwards youneed to allocate the device IP addresses at the device settings at the PLM.
5.3.1 Allocating IP AddressesTo allocate the IP addresses at the pre-installed Windows XP OS take the following path: Press Start >Setting Network Connections > extern (intern is used from pce for configu-ration) > Properties > (Select Internet Protocol [TCP/IP]) > Properties >Advanced > add. At this dialog you can add additional IP Addresses.
We recommend allocating the IP addresses as described in the corresponding wiring diagram anddescribed below. This convention helps recognizing the IP addresses immediately. The allocation works asdescribed below.
88 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
5.3.2 Internal Remote ControlAt a line the PCs of all stations are able to control one single PLM (Note: this is not applicable in master /slave mode, but IP address allocation will be the same). The third byte at the DMS IP corresponds to thethird IP bytes of the other stations. This allows controlling the PLM with all Interfaces at the line. For deviceIPs this works the same way.
192.168.100.200
3.Byte
4.Byte
5.3.3 Example of IP AllocationThe chapter shows our recommendation for allocating IP addresses.For device IPs we recommend using the following ranges at the 4.byte:• Printers from 230…to 239• COM servers from 240…to 249• PLCs 250• Cameras, Comparators from 215…to 229
Each station gets an IP address for its PC and additional IP addresses for its devices (a). The DMS getsadditional IP addresses for the link to the other stations at the line. At this IP addresses the 3.byte is thesame as the 3.byte of the corresponding stations (b).
DMS ABS SCS MAS
PC 192.168.100.200 192.168.101.201 192.168.102.202 192.168.103.203
Camera1 192.168.100.215 192.168.101.216 192.168.102.217 192.168.103.218
Printer1 192.168.100.230 192.168.101.230 192.168.102.230 192.168.103.230
Printer2 192.168.100.231 192.168.101. 231 192.168.102. 231 192.168.103. 231
PLC 192.168.100.250 192.168.101.250 192.168.102.250 -
DMS
PC 192.168.100.200
IP2 192.168.101.200
IP3 192.168.102.200
IP4 192.168.103.200
a)
b)
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 89 / 274
Address Allocation for Printers and Com ServersThe devices should be destinguished by the 4.byte. Start from the smallest value for the first device (e.g.230 for printers) and increase by one to the next device. Repeat this for each rank. See the followingexample.
DMS ABS SCS MAS
PC 192.168.100.200 192.168.101.201 192.168.102.202 192.168.103.203
Camera1 192.168.100.215 192.168.101.216 192.168.102.217 192.168.103.218
Printer1 192.168.100.230 192.168.101.230 192.168.102.230 192.168.103.230
Printer2 192.168.100.231 192.168.101.231 192.168.102.231 192.168.103.231
PLC 192.168.100.250 192.168.101.250 192.168.102.250 -
DMS
PC 192.168.100.200
IP2 192.168.101.200
IP3 192.168.102.200
IP4 192.168.103.200
a)
b)
Address Allocation for Cameras and ComparatorsCameras and comparators must be handled specifically. The reason is that the software interface only canidentifiy the devices by the 4.byte. Hence the 4.byte of cameras and comparators of the entire line must beunique.We recommend to allocate the IP addresses as in the folowing example:• The devices should be destinguished by the 4.byte. Starts from 215 and increment by one for each
device throughout the line.
90 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
5.3.4 COM Interface IPsA special case regarding IP addresses are devices with Com-Port interfaces (e.g. RS232). These areconnected via a com-server. All devices connected to a com-server use the same IP addresses and aredistinguished only by their port. The IP-Address allocation or the port allocation respectively has to be doneat the W&T Comport Redirector software. For more information about the software see the correspondingmanual or the help within the program.The following table shows an example of the COM-Ports allocation:
Device Type Name IP-Address Port DescriptionCOM port (With oneport)
COM10 192.168.102.240 8000 SCS-HRC
COM port (Withthree ports)
COM11 192.168.102.241 8000 SCS-Hand Scanner
COM12 192.168.102.241 8100 (SCS free port)
COM13 192.168.102.241 8200 (SCS free port)
COM port (Withthree ports)
COM14 192.168.103.240 8000 MAS-Hand Scanner
COM15 192.168.103.240 8100 (MAS port)
COM16 192.168.103.240 8200 MAS-Hand Scanner
We recommend starting COM-port names from 10 (COM10…).
5.3.5 Entering IP addresses at the DevicesAfter allocating the IPs at the PCs of the stations the IP addresses have to be entered at the devicesettings dialog.
5.4 Local Cache ModeUsually, the PLM is connected to a central database and all data are written to the database continuously. Ifthe database connection is lost, PLM is not able to continue the production. The local cache mode allowscontinuing the production also if the database connection is lost, by storing the order data to the localcache.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 91 / 274
Enabling Local Cache1. In the system settings, activate the option 'LC01 Local Cache Mode' or activate the module SystemSet-
tingsExtension. See chapter [SystemSettingsExtension module } Page 88].2. To apply the settings, restart the PLM.
Limitations• Only one order is executable. Orders cannot run in parallel.• One line for all ranks (or if split the line with higher part of the ranks, will have to stop).• Resetting the order status is not possible.• Active Directory is not possible.• After production start, orders cannot be changed.• After production start, the line format cannot be changed.• Target quantity is required.• Central format management is not possible.On finalization of production in the local cache mode, the progress bar is shown and the buttons, includingStart production, are hidden. The buttons are shown again only after data transfer from the local cachemode. It is additionally prevented to start the production while the data is transferred from local cache.
5.5 Central Wrapper
5.5.1 ConceptThe Central Wrapper is designed as a PLM module in order to allow print and verification of pallet labels atone central place: the Central Wrapper line. Packaged pallets without labels are delivered from productionlines to the Central Wrapper line where the label for each pallet has to be printed, verified, and finallyexported to the level 4 system.
Only products packaged at the production lines with a configured virtual printer VirtualPrinter_Central-Wrapper can be processed on the Central Wrapper line. This printer is a dummy driver in PLM that doesn'trequire a physical device. It is used only for the definition of pallet labels for the order and, in case of aggre-gation, for linking a hierarchy to a serial number. The dummy printer on the line is compatible with theprinter on the Central Wrapper line and uses the same labels from a shared network storage provided by thecustomer. The label template defined in the virtual printer is used by the Central Wrapper for labelgeneration.
NOTICEShared Network Storage RequiredThe dummy printer on the production line and the printer on the Central Wrapper line usethe same labels. Therefore you have to provide a shared network storage.
General WorkflowIn general, the Central Wrapper workflow is the following:• The packaged pallet leaves the line without label and arrives at the Central Wrapper station.• The pallet and/or it's order are identified by scanning one case on the pallet with a hand scanner.• The printer on the Central Wrapper line downloads the pallet label from the shared network storage.
When processing aggregated pallets, the serial number is retrieved from the hierarchy in the globaldatabase and inserted into the label template. When serializing only the pallets, a new serial number iscreated for the pallet and inserted into the label template.
• The label is printed and manually applied to the pallet.• Processed units are added in the Central Wrapper and visible in the screen Processed Units.
• The label is verified manually with the hand scanner.• The pallet information is exported to the level 4 system.
92 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Pallet identificationThe pallet on the Central Wrapper line is identified by the content:
• By scanning the barcode of the packaged case. For static production, the order name is expected in AI400 (Order name) that is to be a part of the case datamatrix/barcode.
Alternatively, if AI 400 is not used, the PLM Central Wrapper module identifies the order the palletbelongs to via AI 10 (batch number), which must be contained in the Datamatrix/barcode.
• By manual search in the PLM Central Wrapper module.Three different types of production are supported and there are three different workflows in the CentralWrapper module, correspondingly:
Production type Pallet state onentering Centralwrapper line
Identified by Action in CentralWrapper
Static production No tracking of palletsin PLM.
Order is identified by AI 400 (Ordername) with scanning the barcode/datamatrix or by manual search byorder name / lot.
The label templateassigned in the order isretrieved from the sharednetwork storage. A SSCCis created for the palletand inserted into thetemplate. The serializedlabel is printed.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 93 / 274
Serializationwithout aggre-gation
Pallet has no serialnumber. SN needs tobe generated.
Order is identified by AI 400 (Ordername) with scanning the barcode/datamatrix or by manual search byorder name / lot.
The new serial numberbased on the order config-uration is created and sentto the printer.
Aggregation Pallet already existsin the PLM orderhierarchy and has aserial number.
Pallet is identified by scanning thebarcode/datamatrix of child case or bymanual search by SGTIN or SSCC.
The printer on the CentralWrapper line downloadsthe pallet label from theshared network storage.When processingaggregated pallets, theserial number is retrievedfrom the hierarchy in theglobal database andinserted into the labeltemplate. When serializingonly the pallets, a newserial number is createdfor the pallet and insertedinto the label template.
5.5.2 PrerequisitesRequirements to PLM Software Usage• The production lines run without local cache.• The orders of the pallets that are processed by the Central Wrapper are in running, suspended, or
finished state.Otherwise the export of the pallet is not possible.
NOTICEClose suspend ordersIf you suspend orders at the packaging line, e.g. to start the next order, remember toclose the order at the packaging line after the Central Wrapper has finished the suspendedorder.
• The Central Wrapper line requires no running production.• The printer type of the virtual printer driver on the line and the physical printer on the Central Wrapper are
the same.Currently supported printer: Zebra 170xiIII
• The printers are working with remote labels only. The labels are available in the shared network storage.
Other requirements• The pallet delivered to the Central Wrapper line should have at least one packaged case with visible
label.• The pallet labels configured in the files are of the same physical size as the printer will use the same
ribbon for all labels.
5.5.3 Device Configuration
5.5.3.1 Packaging Line
The production line that works with the Central Wrapper line has to contain a dummy Printer Virtual-Printer_CentralWrapper.The purpose of the driver is to provide the label configuration for the Central Wrapper. With the CentralWrapper the pallets are not labelled on the production lines but are sent to the Central Wrapper line afterpackaging. The labels for pallets are printed and verified in the Central Wrapper. In order to load relevantorder and / or line format information, one case in the pallet is scanned. The printer in the Central Wrapperline uses the device format (label template) from the virtual printer of the line format where the pallet waspackaged. Both printers should be of the same type.
Device parameters of VirtualPrinter_CentralWrapper:
94 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Parameter Default value DescriptionboxingRank 4 The rank is the same as in the Central Wrapper module.
Printer ZEBRA_170xiIII Printer driver from dropdown list. The driver has to be the same as inthe Central Wrapper module. Currently only the ZEBRA printer issupported.
monitorPrint not selected Can be enabled for test purposes only. Prints the label on the screen.
printerMode No special requirements. The mode is defined according to the order.
labelPath The path to the label files on a shared network drive.
Barcode field inlabel
Use only with monitorPrint enabled settings. Defines which label fieldshould be printed as a barcode.
The virtual printer is activated and configured in the line format.
5.5.3.2 Central Wrapper Line
The Central Wrapper line requires the following devices:
Device Driver Purpose Device configurationPrinter Zebra_170xill (currently
supported only)Print of pallet labels boxingRank is the same as at the
packaging line.
Printinspectionscanner
Honeywell_Scanner Verification of palletlabels
Reader mode: SERIAL-IZATION_INSPECTION. boxingRank is thesame as at the packaging line.
Palletexportermodule
PCE_PSM_Exporter Send the commis-sioned pallet to level4 system
URL: PSM Web Service that receives the IDof the closed unit (usually pallet) andsends the unit information to the level 4system. Rank: the rank of the units that aresent to the level 4 system.
GlobalScanner
Honeywell_Scanner Scanning child itemsin order to identify thepallet / order
NeedDeviceFormat not selected.boxingRank set to "0"
CentralWrapper
CentralWrapper Central print, reprint,verification of palletlabels
See below
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 95 / 274
NOTICEVerification of pallet labelVerify the printed/reprinted label with the scanner just after printing since PLM has theproper order information uploaded. If you don't verify the label, the scanned pallet labelwon't be recognized.
Central Wrapper module
Parameter Recommended value DescriptionHistory size 20 The amount of processed units stored in the history.
boxingRank 4
Order search AI 10 (BATCH/LOT) The AI from the setting should be a part of the scannedbarcode / datamatrix code of static orders (without serial-ization). The AI value is used for determining the ordername for static orders. The values for the configured AIhave to be unique per each order.
The user right mayUseCentralWrapper allows to use the Central Wrapper functionality. Otherwise the UIof the Central Wrapper is still available in a "view" mode: the buttons are disabled and the read informationfrom the scanner is not processed.The history of processed items is saved and still available after a restart of the PLM.
Zebra Printer (Zebra_170xill)Recommended configuration:
Parameter Recommended value DescriptionboxingRank 4 The rank should be the same as at the packaging line
printerMode BUFFERED_PRINTER
buffer 1
remoteLabel Selected
labelPath The path to the label files on a shared network drive.
5.5.4 Working with the Central Wrapper module1 Go to the Home View.
96 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
2 Click CentralWrapper.
ð The main panel of the Central Wrapper, CentralWrapper - Processed units, is openedshowing the history.
ð Yellow units are not verified, green units are verified. White color indicates selection. The label fieldcontains serial number / SSCC or the lot in case of static production.
3 Optional: In order to create a CSV file with all processed units from the history, click Export all.
4 Optional: If the order of the unit is still running, each item from the history can be reprinted with thebutton Print label. A case on a new pallet can only be scanned if the label of the previous palletwas verified.
5 Scan the new unit with the global scanner.ð The label is printed. The new unit is added to the history if the operation was successful. The oldest
unit is removed from the history if the amount defined the parameter History size is reached.
6 Optional: To open the order search form, click the button Manually.
ð The view CentralWrapper - Select running order is opened.
ð You can select an aggregation order if the field sGTIN or SSCC contains the full information. Theinformation is required since a single pallet has to be found by the sGTIN / SSCC of the child item.
ð For static orders or if you only serialize orders, select the order from the list.
7 Optional: To see the details of the selected order, click Details.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 97 / 274
8 Click Next.
ð The view is different for aggregation / non-aggregation scenarios:ð Confirmation form for the non-aggregation scenarios (static / serialization only):
ð Click Print Label. The new label is created and the main panel with updated history is shown.
ð Confirmation form for the aggregation scenario:
ð The view shows the panel in the hierarchy. The pallet found is highlighted. The button PrintLabel appears only for the pallet found.
ð Click Next.
ð The pallet label is printed and the main panel with updated history is shown.
5.5.5 Using the SSCC ExporterIn order to be able to store pallets in the automated high rack, the control system needs to know the palletSSCC, among other parameters. As this information is stored in an external SQL database (NOT referring tothe PCE Site Database) and not provided by the SAP systems, the SSCC exporter, installed at the CentralWrapper inserts the data into the database.
5.5.5.1 Process Requirements
The following parameters need to be stored in the high rack database (The information in bracket shows theorigin of the data):
98 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
SSCC (For T&T created as part of the hierarchy at the production line, for E2E and BC to be assigned by thePCE system latest at the central wrapper)Product code (shall be linked to an AI in system parameters, AI will contain SAP Product ID from productionorder, original data source is IDOC field E1AFKOL-MATNR)Batchno (shall be linked to an AI in system parameters, AI will contain batch no from production order,original data source is IDOC field /FNC/AFKOLS-VERDA)SplitNo (shall be defined as a system parameter, constant 00 for all pallets handled by the PCE centralwrapper)Warehousetype (shall be defined as a system parameter, constant [empty] for all pallets handled by thePCE central wrapper)Pallet height (shall be defined as a system parameter, constant 9999 for all pallets handled by the PCEcentral wrapper)
Affected Tables in the Warehouse DatabaseThe following tables within the warehouse database are affected:TblPallet (Table used by the high rack control system)
SQL Server ConnectionConnection to the SQL server is made via port 1433 at an IP address which is configurable, using achangeable username and password.
5.5.5.2 SSCC Exporter Workflow
Once the information has been collected the FK SSCC Exporter proceeds as follows:1. Search for the SSCC in table tbl_pallet
If found: continue with step 2If not found: continue with step 3
2. Overwrite the current values for product code, batch no, split no, warehouse type and pallet heightwithin the database TblPallet
3. Create an entry with the parameters SSCC, product code, batch no, split no, warehouse type and palletheight within the database TblPallet
4. In case step 2 or step 3 fail, a warning is shown in the FK SSCC Exporter history.
5.5.5.3 Setting up the SSCC Exporter
1. In the sidebar, click System Settings.
2. Click Create/edit device.
3. Click Add.
4. Choose a name for the device.
5. From the list Class name: choose the entry 'FK_SSCC_Exporter'.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 99 / 274
6. In the sidebar, click System Settings.
7. Click Edit device settings.
8. Select the tab of the device you just created.9. From the list 'boxingRank' choose the entry '(4) Pallet'.10. Activate the checkbox 'needDeviceFormat'.
This checkbox is activated by default.11. Activate the checkbox 'showDeviceFrame'.
If the checkbox is activated, the debug console is shown after a PLM restart. This checkbox is activatedby default.
12. In the field 'dbUrl', insert the IP address of the warehouse database’s server and the database name.13. In the field 'dbUser', insert the user name.14. In the field 'dbPassword', insert the user’s password.
15. The following fields are set per default:– The field 'attempts' shows the number of attempts to write data into the table 'tbl_pallet'.
Per default the number is set to 5. After 5 attempts, the high-rack exporter shows an error message.– The field 'ProductCode' is set to 'R07'.
The SSCC Exporter needs to identify the order a pallet belongs to. The ProductCode must be definedin R07 in the order data.
– The field 'BatchNo', is set to '10'.The batch number is defined in AI10 per default.
100 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
– The field 'SplitNo' is set to '00' per default.– The field 'WarehouseType' is set to 'auto' per default.– The field 'PalletHeight' is set to '9999' per default.
16. Click Save .
5.5.5.4 Working with the SSCC Exporter
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 101 / 274
Click on the exporter device in the debug console, to show the history of exported pallets.
When a serialized or aggregated pallet label is verified with the hand scanner, the FK SSCC Exporter showsthe pallet in the history: (values: SSCC, product name, batch number, split number, warehouse type, palletheight)
Confirm the message.If the entry in the database fails, an error message is shown in the history.
102 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
5.5.6 Alarm List
Number Message39001 {0}: Error on getting data from database: {1}
39002 {0}: Order {1} is not running. The unit processing is skipped.
39003 {0}: Serial {1} not found
39004 {0}: Parent unit on rank {1} not found for serial {2} (rank {3})
39005 {0}: Virtual printer of type {1} not found in line format: {2}
39006 {0}: No order data were found for ranks {1}
39007 {0}: the printer of type {1} doesn't exist on the current line
39008 {0}: Error on creation of new serial: {1}
39009 {0}: order {1} not found in database
39010 {0}: the read value {1} doesn't contain order name
39011 {0}: Line format not found for order {1}
39012 {0}: Processing is not allowed with running production. Please stop the production in order toproceed
39013 {0}: Field values for order are not loaded. Error: {1}
39014 {0}: Could not load order / product data. Processing aborted
39015 {0}: Device {1} is not started. Error: {2}
39016 {0}: No user right for usage of Central Wrapper
39017 {0}: Export to file is failed
39018 {0}: Error occurred on stop of device {1}: {2}
39019 Unit with serial number <SERIAL NUMBER> is decommissioned therefore it cannot be processed
39020 Unit with serial number <SERIAL NUMBER> is non-verified therefore it cannot be processed
39021 More than one order found by AI <AI NAME> with value <AI VALUE>: <ORDER NAMES>.
39022 Order not found by AI <AI NAME> with value <AI VALUE>
39023 Unit with serial number <SERIAL NUMBER> is already sent for export therefore it cannot beprocessed
39024 Printer <PRINTER NAME> is not started. Printer format <FORMAT NAME> doesn't exist
39100 {0}: Export {1} with serial {2} failed after {3} attempts.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 103 / 274
6 ProductionFrom the Production screen all settings concerning the production can be made. Also production itself isstarted and controlled from here.
Create devices before editing production settingsBefore editing the production settings all devices have to be created (See chapter [Creating andEditing Devices } Page 28]).
6.1 Production Settings ScreenTo open the Production settings screen press Production at the menu panel on the right hand side of thescreen. The following screen appears:
Production
Depending on the respective user rights, the following operations are available from here:
Name FunctionStart production via order Choose an order and start the production
Test run via line format Choose a line format and start a test run
Add/edit order Add or edit an order
Add/edit line format Add or edit a line format
Create/edit product Create or edit a product
Order results create report Create a report of order results
AI management Enable/disable AI management data
Reset order status Reset the status of an order
Move order to line Move order to produce it at another line
Move serial numbers to order Moves unused serial numbers to another order
6.2 Line FormatThe line format contains the settings for all used devices at a line. Here the fields and permitted values ofeach device are defined.Before setting up a line format, ensure that:• camera formats are created• a print format is createdPlease note: For High Resolution Camera a default format is used.Open: Displays a HTML view of the generated report.
6.2.1 Line Format Setup ProcedureAt the setup of a line format you have to perform the following steps:
104 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Step Action Explanation1 Add line format See chapter [Creating a New Line
Format } Page 105]
2 Edit line format See chapter [Editing LineFormats } Page 106]
3 Edit device settings at line format See chapter [Editing Device Settings atLine Format } Page 107]
6.2.2 Add/Edit Line Format ScreenTo create or edit a line format press Production > Add/Edit line format to get to the Add/Editline format screen. The screen looks as follows:
Production > Add/Edit line format
The list on the right hand side of the screen shows all existing line formats. Select a line format to view ormodify it. Processing is possible only if the selected line format is not linked to a suspended order.
6.2.3 Creating a New Line FormatPress Add to create a new line format. The screen looks as follows:
Production > Add/Edit line format > Add
Fill in a unique name for the new format and press save. Additional description is optional. To create theline format press Save.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 105 / 274
You can also copy a line format and use its settings for a newline format. To copy, select the line format you want from thelist and press the copy button (see screen in chapter [Add/EditLine Format Screen } Page 105]), change the name and thesettings and press Save.
At the Add/Edit line format screen you can edit the following fields:
Name FunctionLine format Enter the name of the new line format
Line f. descr. Here you can enter additional information about the line format
Date last changed Shows the last date of change
Product Select the corresponding product name
Product descr. Additional information about the product
6.2.4 Editing Line FormatsTo edit a line format press Production > Add/Edit line format to get to the Add/Edit lineformat screen.
Select an existing line format from the list to edit.To search for a line format by name, click Enable filter. A text field appears above the list. If you starttyping the name of the line format, the list is filtered immediately. Be aware that this search is case-sensitive.You can edit the line format information. See chapter [Line Format Setup Procedure } Page 104]. Thescreen looks as follows:
Production > Add/Edit line format
6.2.5 Use Wildcard FunctionTo improve the usage of the wildcard functionality it can be set in the line format. For the backward compat-ibility the option useWildcards in the device settings will be used for old line formats where the option isnot used in the line format directly. For new line formats the device option will be the default value in the lineformat.
NOTICE'Use Wildcards' for ReadersIf you activate the option 'Read-only' and the option 'Use Wildcards' is deactivated for areader (camera, scanner) in the line format, on saving the line format a dialog with thesuggestion to activate the option 'Use Wildcard' is shown. If you confirm the dialog, theoption 'Use Wildcard' is activated and the line format is saved. The reason is that theoption 'Read-only' consumes any value read and the option is only reachable with theoption 'Use Wildcard' activated.
106 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
6.2.6 Special Barcode Configuration in the Label
Purpose Example: datamatrix/barcode value
Description
Partial/full unit inone label
01-21-00 or 01-21-17-10-00 Dynamic generation of full / partial units. The code isautomatically selected. For full units: 01-21-17-10,for partial units: 17-10-00
Partial/full unit inone label
01-21-17-10[00-02-17-37] Part without square brackets defines the valuesprinted on DMX for complete units. Part in squarebrackets defines the content for incomplete units.
Alias 17-10-30(@37)10-17-400(@R12)
The value of the AI defined in the alias (@) is usedinstead of the original AI. For example, if the contentof the DMX is 17-10-30(@37), the value of AI 37 isused instead of AI 30, and the content of the label inthis case is (17)181212(10)ABC(30)15 (where 15is the value from AI 37).
Definition of dateformat in barcode
01C-17(yyMM00)-10 (frenchcode)
Formatting for the date specified directly in the DMXcontent.
6.2.7 Editing Device Settings at Line FormatAt the line format you have to determine which fields/variables of a device have to be used at the line. Thefields are defined by loading a device format. The parameters can be edited.
Create devices before editing formatsDevices have to be created before you can set the formats (See chapter [Creating and EditingDevices } Page 28]).
Some devices manage their formats by their own; this means editing the settings of these devices is notdone at the line format. The path for changing the settings for these devices is as described in the followingtable:
Name FunctionHRC At the monitor from the station where the HRC is installed switch from PLM
to HRC AI-CORE using the switch button.
SMC At the PLM go to the Home screen and select the SMC.
PLC Press System settings > Edit device settings
Devices that manage their formats by their own do not have the possibility to load the formats into the PLMbut need to be activated (see below).
Activate deviceTo use a device at a line format it is essential to set a checkmark at the “activated” checkbox,put in a name for the device and set the variables.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 107 / 274
Set a checkmark at the “activated” checkbox, enter a name for the device and set the variables. Select thewished line format from the list (see chapter [Editing Line Formats } Page 106]) and press Devices. Thefollowing screen appears:
Production > Add/Edit line format > Devices
For every used device you have to perform the following steps (see also at the following screen):
Step Description Explanation1 Select a device From the tab menu on the upper frame of the screen. You see a
tab for every previously created device.
2 Set a checkmark at theActivated checkbox.
If the checkmark is set, the device can be used in the line.
3 Press load formats Loads the device formats stored on the cameras, printers andpossibly other connected devices to the PCE Line Manager.
4 Select the desired device formatyou want to use at the lineformat.
From the List.
5 Press load fields to loadthe preconfigured settings ofthe selected device format.
Possible parameters are retrieved from the selected formats.The types of codes (e.g. DMX, GTIN or CIP) are loaded into theleft column. The formats of the Identification numbers respec-tively the value ranges of other variables are loaded into theright column. Type and number of displayed parametersdepend on the camera settings.
The figure below shows the device settings at the line format of a Smart Camera:
Production > Add/Edit line format > Devices > Load formats
108 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
‘Read-only’: This function is used, for example, if you have a batch of items that has already been printed.The production was stopped and now the items have to be further processed. The serial numbers do not yetexist at the database. Then the serial numbers only have to be read and saved into the database. Forregular serialization this function is deactivated.
NOTICE'Use Wildcards' for ReadersIf you activate the option 'Read-only' and the option 'Use Wildcards' is deactivated for areader (camera, scanner) in the line format, on saving the line format a dialog with thesuggestion to activate the option 'Use Wildcard' is shown. If you confirm the dialog, theoption 'Use Wildcard' is activated and the line format is saved. The reason is that theoption 'Read-only' consumes any value read and the option is only reachable with theoption 'Use Wildcard' activated.
Parameter PrefixesAll parameters with ## (double hash) in front of it are for codes:(##) DMX(##BC) BARCODE 128(##HR) HUMAN READABLE(##RF) RFID EPCAt their fields you have to input the content the code has to contain. E.g.: At the field ‘DM0’ select (##DMX).Fill in the AIs separated by a hyphen. Example:
AIs to be embedded in the DMX code Fill into the DM0 fieldGTIN (01); SERIAL(21); USE BY OR EXPIRY(17);BATCH/LOT(10)
01-21-17-10
At the parameter fields in the left row you select the field content type. In the right row you define the fieldcontent format. The coding refers to the GS1 standard.All parameters with X in front of it are wildcard fields for human readable text. Here you can input any text toprint it onto the unit.At the Description field you can add information about the special configuration of the device in this lineformat.
Save the settingsAfter completion of the format settings press Save.
6.2.8 Device Settings at Line Format - PLCThis chapter describes the settings and parameter of the PLC.
Production > Add/Edit line format > Devices > (PLC tab)
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 109 / 274
For the PLC there are no predefined device formats to load. The device format is created by typing the nameof the device format into the field ‘Name’.Enter the name for the device format and press Save. The parameter fields appear. Now you can edit thesettings of the PLC, afterwards press Save. Which parameter fields appear at the PLC tab is depending onthe system settings of the PLCFrequently used parameters are:
Parameter Description for SCS
Parameter Name DescriptionDB1.DBD4656 Multilayer on • Parameter is enabled "1": Multiple layers are expected, the PLC
compares the count of layers inside the carton with the "layer count".The case is finished after all layers where captured and "Case Full"signal was sent.
• Parameter is disabeld "0": Only one layer per case is expected, aftereach trigger the case is finished.
Example with three layersFor each layer the camera has a defined position: layer1=position1;layer2=position2; layer3=position3.
First Layer (Camera at position1): The operator puts the first layer into thecarton and triggers a picture. The layer count (3) is not yet reached, thecamera moves to the position2. (The first picture could be reset bysending the "Reset Last Picture" signal. Camera would move back toposition1).
Second Layer (Camera at position2): The operator puts the second layerinto the carton and triggers a picture. The layer count (3) is not yetreached, the camera moves to the position3. (The second picture could bereset by sending the "Reset Last Picture" signal. Camera would move backto position2).
Third Layer (Camera at position3): The operator puts the third layer intothe carton and triggers a picture. The layer count (3) is reached. (The thirdpicture could be reset by sending the "Reset Last Picture" signal. Camerawould move back to position2). To close the case aggregation the "CaseFull" signal has to be sent. After receiving the "Case Full" signal thecamera moves to position "Layer1" and next case can be aggregated.
DB1.DBD4878 Product height The product height is needed to calculate the position of the camera.
DB1.DBD4874 Layer count The layer count is the number of layers inside a case.
M9.5 One HeightModus on
This mode is used in combination with the "Multilayer on" mode activated.When this mode is active a case with multiple layers is expected but eachlayer will be captured in the same product height. When the layer count isreached, case aggregation is finished by the "Case Full" signal.
ErrorsDB1.DBX4872.0
productheightand layercountto high
Product height and number of layers exceed maximum possibledisplacement range of the camera.
DB1.DBX4872.1
cameraposition error
Camera is not able to reach the position.
DB1.DBX4872.2
Invalid input"One HeightModus on" or"Multilayer on"
Settings "One Height Modus on" or "Multilayer on" is not allowed. Thecombination of parameter settings ("Multilayer on" = 0) + ("Layer count"> 1) + (“One Height Modus on" = 0) ist not allowed.
• Belt speed: Speed of the conveyor belt in m/min.
110 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
• Camera 1 Offset: Camera inspection area. Starting value: 0 mmIncrease value: Adjustment of the inspection area in running directionDecrease value: Adjustment of the inspection area against the running direction
• Printer 1 Offset: Print area. Starting value: 0 mmIncrease value: Adjustment of the inspection area in running directionDecrease value: Adjustment of the inspection area against the running direction
• Product Width: Product length of the side directed at the print head in mm.• Product Width Tolerance: Allowed tolerance of the product length in mm.
6.2.9 Device Settings at Line Format - Smart CameraThe screen and the table below show the setting options for the Smart Camera at the line format. At theparameter settings the fields to be printed are defined.
NOTICE'Use Wildcards'If you activate the option 'Read-only' and the option 'Use Wildcards' is deactivated in theline format, on saving the line format a dialog with the suggestion to activate the option'Use Wildcard' is shown. If you confirm the dialog, the option 'Use Wildcard' is activatedand the line format is saved. The reason is that the option 'Read-only' consumes anyvalue read and the option is only reachable with the option 'Use Wildcard' activated.
Production > Add/Edit line format > Devices > (Smart Camera Tab)
Execute the steps as described in chapter [Editing Device Settings at Line Format } Page 107]. Theparameters available depend on the selected preconfigured format. Frequently used parameters are:
Parameter Column 1 Column 2DMO Type of the data matrix code Formatting of the data matrix code
OCV Type of the plain text verification Formatting of the plain text verification
Code Barcode type Formatting of the barcode
Pix Without meaning Without meaning
6.2.10 Device Settings at Line Format - High Resolution CameraThe screen and the table below show the setting options for the HRC at the line format.
NOTICE'Use Wildcards'If you activate the option 'Read-only' and the option 'Use Wildcards' is deactivated in theline format, on saving the line format a dialog with the suggestion to activate the option'Use Wildcard' is shown. If you confirm the dialog, the option 'Use Wildcard' is activatedand the line format is saved. The reason is that the option 'Read-only' consumes anyvalue read and the option is only reachable with the option 'Use Wildcard' activated.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 111 / 274
Figure: Production > Add/Edit line format > Devices > (Megapixel Camera Tab)
Execute the steps as described in chapter [Editing Device Settings at Line Format } Page 107]. Theparameters available depend on the selected preconfigured format. Frequently used parameters are:
Parameter Column 1 Column 2ContentSize Application Identifier 37, the number of units
contained, automatically generated field in readerwith rank>1
Number of boxes per bundle orcarton
boxHeight Without meaning Box-length transverse to theconveying direction [mm]
boxWidth Box length in the conveyingdirection [mm]
bundleHeight Bundle length transverse to theconveying direction [mm]
bundleWidth Bundle length in the conveyingdirection [mm]
6.2.11 Device Settings at Line Format - Comparator 7/8The screen and the table below show the setting options for the Comparator 7/8 at the line format.
NOTICE'Use Wildcards'If you activate the option 'Read-only' and the option 'Use Wildcards' is deactivated in theline format, on saving the line format a dialog with the suggestion to activate the option'Use Wildcard' is shown. If you confirm the dialog, the option 'Use Wildcard' is activatedand the line format is saved. The reason is that the option 'Read-only' consumes anyvalue read and the option is only reachable with the option 'Use Wildcard' activated.
112 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Figure: Production > Add/Edit line format > Devices > (Comparator 7/8 Tab)
Execute the steps as described in chapter [ } Page 107][Editing Device Settings at LineFormat } Page 107]. The parameters available depend on the selected preconfigured format. Frequentlyused parameters are:
Parameter MeaningReading type Code type
refCode Code type (Column 1)Code format (Column 2)
6.2.12 Device Settings at Line Format - Hand ScannerThe screen and the table below shows the setting options for the hand scanner at the line format.
NOTICE'Use Wildcards'If you activate the option 'Read-only' and the option 'Use Wildcards' is deactivated in theline format, on saving the line format a dialog with the suggestion to activate the option'Use Wildcard' is shown. If you confirm the dialog, the option 'Use Wildcard' is activatedand the line format is saved. The reason is that the option 'Read-only' consumes anyvalue read and the option is only reachable with the option 'Use Wildcard' activated.
Figure: Production > Add/Edit line format > Devices > (Hand Scanner Tab)
Execute the steps as described in chapter [Editing Device Settings at Line Format } Page 107].The following table describes the possible AI field selections:
Parameter Meaning
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 113 / 274
Reading Mode STREAM_MODE: The reader is on and reads every code in the readingrange.TRIGGER_MODE: The hand scanner reads only after the trigger key hasbeen actuated.
ContentSize Application Identifier 37, the number of units contained, automaticallygenerated field in reader with rank > 1
6.2.13 Device Settings at Line Format - Printer Item LevelThe screen and the table below show the setting options for the Wolke Printer at the line format.
Figure: Production > Add/Edit line format > Devices > (Wolke Printer Tab)
Execute the steps as described in chapter [Editing Device Settings at Line Format } Page 107]. Theparameters available depend on the selected line format. Frequently used parameters are:
Parameter Column 1 Column 2DMX Data matrix code type Data matrix code
EXP Expiry date type Expiry date format
GTIN GTIN number type GTIN number format
LOT Type Charge Charge format
SN Serial number type Serial number format
6.2.14 Device Settings at Line Format - Zebra Case LevelThe screen and the table below show the setting options for the Zebra Printer at the line format.
Figure: Production > Add/Edit line format > Devices > (Zebra Printer Tab)
114 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Execute the steps as described in chapter [Editing Device Settings at Line Format } Page 107]. Theparameters available depend on the selected preconfigured format. Frequently used parameters are:
Parameter (Fieldname defined at label) Column 1 Column 2FN Field number type Field number format
6.2.15 Device Settings at Line Format - SystemSettingsExtension modulePrerequisiteThe device 'SystemSettingsExtension' was created.
Procedure1 Activate the module in the line format.2 Select a device format from the list or create a new one.
3 Click Save.
ð The dropdown-list 'LC01 (Local Cache Mode)' is shown:ð 'System Settings' defines that the setting value is taken from the system settings like working without
the module.ð Yes/no activates/deactivates the Local Cache Mode correspondingly.
ProductionIf you selected 'yes' or 'no' in the SystemSettingsExtension module, on the start of production the LocalCache Mode is activated or deactivated. If you selected 'System Settings', the system setting 'LC01 (LocalCache Mode)' is still valid and defines whether the Local cache Mode is used.The setting in the line format is active while the production is running. For example, if the setting LC01(Local Cache Mode) is not active on the line, but 'yes' is selected in the line format, the production starts inlocal cache mode. As soon as the order is finished, the settings in the line format are not used anymore.
6.2.16 Line Format ReportA line format report contains all settings of the line format including device settings. To create a line formatreport go to the Add/Edit line format screen (see chapter [Editing Line Formats } Page 106]) andselect an existing line format from the list to edit. Press PDF Report to generate a line format report.
Figure: Production > Add/Edit line format > PDF Report
Choose a customized report template at the field ’Design’. Different output formats can be selected at thefield ’Format’. This report contains all relevant data from the line format. The report is digitally signed andcan be archived (customized) or be printed directly.
6.3 Product ManagementA product at the PLM is a set of information about a product that can be assigned to a line format or to anorder e.g. GTIN, quantity, bundle size, case size, pallet size. The values of the product are then filled intothe fields of the line format / order. The possibility to reuse the contents of variables avoids having to re-
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 115 / 274
enter it at the creation of every order. The AI values are then transferred into the fields of the order. Creating aproduct is not essential but optional. The Product Management settings at the PLM are equivalent to thesettings at the PSM. They use the same products and these can be created or edited at both systems.
6.3.1 Product Management ScreenTo get to the Product Management: screen press Production > Add/edit product.The following screenappears:
Production > Add/edit product
The list on the right hand side of the screen shows all existing products. Select a product to view or modifyit.With the buttons at the lower part of the screen you can call up the corresponding functions as described inthe following chapters. The table below gives an overview of these functions:
Name FunctionRemove Remove an existing product
Enable Filter Use search filter to filter by product name
Details Set the product specific content of values to be read by the camera
Add Create a new product
6.3.2 Creating and Deleting a ProductTo create a product at the product management screen (see chapter [Product ManagementScreen } Page 116]) press Add and type in a product name at the field ‘Product’ and press Save. Youcan add a description of the product at the field 'Product descr.’. Confirm by pressing Save. To delete aproduct press Remove instead of Add.
116 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
6.3.3 Adding and Deleting Application IDs at a ProductTo add or delete Application IDs at a product go to the product managementscreen (see chapter[Product Management Screen } Page 116]) and select a product from the list. Press Details. Thefollowing screen appears:
Production > Add/edit product > (select product) Details
At this screen you see all application IDs that are defined at the product (if applicable).Press Add to define a new ID to the product. The following dialog appears:
Figure: Production > Add/edit product > (select product) Details > Add
Now you can define a new product field. For the product field you can define the following values:
Field Explanation In this example‘Rank’ Here you define for which rank the field is
valid. 0 = Global -> applicable for all Ranks1-4 = Unit, Bundle, Case, Pallet5-x = Additional ranks -> line specific
Rank1: DMS
‘App. ID’ Here you define of which ID type the fieldis.
GTIN
‘Format’ Here you define which format the ID has. GTIN is always a 14 digit number
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 117 / 274
Press OK to create the new product field. At the following screen that appears you can choose the createdApplication ID and edit the value of the ID. (In this example this is the GTIN that has to be entered into the‘Value’ field).
Production > Add/edit Product > (select product) Details > Add > Ok
6.4 Order ManagementAn order at the PLM contains information about the order and the AI values are assigned.
6.4.1 Loading an Order via Hand ScannerIf you want to reuse an existing order you can filter for that order by scanning the corresponding barcode.Activate the search filter by pressing Enable filter. Set the curser into the ‘search’ field. Then you havethe following possibilities:• Scan any previously produced barcode of the order• Scan a code that contains the order number. This code can be created online via an ordinary code
creator website
6.4.2 Adding and Editing OrdersTo make an order usable you have to assign a line format to the order. If you have assigned a line format toan order, the order uses the settings of the line format.
Selection of a ProductYou can additionally select a product. If you select a product at the order management screen, the AIsettings from the line format will be overwritten and used at the order but not saved to the line format. Onlyselect a product if you want to use the device settings of a line format in combination with an order that isnot assigned to the line. This could make sense if you do not wish to save another line format.
118 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
To add or edit a new order press Production > Add/Edit order. The following screen appears:
Production > Add/Edit Order
The list on the right hand side of the screen shows all orders that are still open and not yet concluded.
6.4.3 Adding a New OrderTo produce an order it has to be “created in the PLM”. Press Production > Add/Edit order. If thereare orders that have not yet been assigned, these are shown in the list on the right hand site of the screen.Select one of them to use it.If you want to create a new order press Add, write the number into the ‘ Order#‘ field and confirm with OK.The new order is now created. To edit settings for the order see chapter [Editing an Order } Page 119].
Existing production data can be reusedDuplicates will not be accepted by the system. However, for ease of use, the production data ofan already existing, not yet executed order can be taken over by entering data manually.
6.4.4 Editing an OrderTo edit an order press Production > Add/Edit Order.At this screen (see figure below) you canselect an order from the list and change its settings. You can filter the entries by activating the search filter.Activate the search filter by pressing Enable filter. Now type in the number of the order you aresearching. To disable the filter, press Disable filter. Edit the settings at the input fields and at thescroll down menus. After you have changed any settings, the OK button appears. Confirm the new settingsby pressing OK.
FProduction > Add/Edit Order
At the Order Management screen you can edit the following fields:
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 119 / 274
Name FunctionOrder # Here you have to enter the number of the order
Order descr. Here you can enter additional information about the order e.g. specialsettings
Line format Here you have to select the corresponding line format
Line f. descr. Here you can enter additional information about the line format
Product: Here you have to select the corresponding product name
Product descr. Here you can enter additional information about the product
Before you can start the order, you have to add order details (see chapter [Adding Order Details } Page 121]).
120 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
6.4.5 Adding Order DetailsTo add order details manually press Production > Add/Edit order. Select an order and pressDetails.The Following screen appears:
Production > Add/Edit Order > Details
Depending on the device settings used in the line format you can edit the corresponding fields. To add afield press Add. You can check all inputs for plausibility by pressing Verify Data. After editing confirmwith OK. Necessary inputs will be checked for plausibility.
To input details via hand scanner see chapter [Loading an Order via Hand Scanner } Page 118].
6.4.6 Deleting an OrderTo delete an order go to the Order Management screen and select an order (see chapter [Adding and EditingOrders } Page 118]). Press Remove and confirm with the OK.
6.4.7 Creating an Order ReportTo create an order report, go to the Production Settings screen (see chapter [Production SettingsScreen } Page 104]) and press Order results create report in order to get to the OrderReport screen. Select an existing line format from the list to edit. Press PDF Report to generate a lineformat report in the selected format. The following window appears:
Production > Order results create report > (Select order) > PDF Report
Select a customized report template at the field ‘Design’. Different output formats can be selected at the field‘Format’. This report contains all relevant data from the order as well as a list with log file entries during therespective production run. The report is digitally signed and can be archived (customized) or be printeddirectly. An order report can only be created when the order is finished.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 121 / 274
Storage of order data- Upon completion of production the data of the order will be stored automatically on the server.This allows creating a report at a later point in time.- All PDF reports generated will be stored on the path specified in the system settings.
6.4.8 Resetting the Order Status
Production > Reset Order Status
Pressing the button Reset Order will reset a completed order to the status “Order created”.
6.4.9 Move Order to Line
Production > Move order to line
In companies with several lines in a database, orders can be switched among the various lines via thismenu.Example: Production “line A” has processed an order. This order must now undergo further processing on“line B”. The user can use the PCE Line Manager to suspend this order on “line A” and, taking the existingline formats into account, move the order to “line B”. The order is now suspended on “line B” and ready forfurther processing on line B.Additional use: Moving an order from an automated line to a reworking place.
6.4.10 Reopening a Closed OrderTo reopen a finished order you have to own the appropriate user rights.In case an order was finished but has to be reopened for further processing, follow these steps:
122 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Press Production > Reset order status > (Select the order you want to reset) >Reset Order.
6.4.11 Reworking an OrderProduction orders that have been produced and finished in PLM, exported to an L4 system and potentiallybeen altered there, can be reworked. Both, end-to-end orders and aggregated orders, can be used.
6.4.11.1 Preconditions for Reworking an Order
• L4 Rework module is installed both on PLM and PSM.• Connectors for import and export of rework hierarchies are installed and configured on PSM.• PSM is connected to a L4 system capable of processing rework up- and downloads.• The firewall allows communication between PSM and PLM.• PLM is not in local cache mode.
In the view "Production settings", the button "Create Rework order" is only visible if the current PLM isnot in local cache mode.
• PLM runs on a line with suitable devices for reworking (typically hand scanners, but also automatedinspection and aggregation equipment)
• The current user has the right "mayReworkOrders".• Only orders in "finished" or "sent" state will be searched.• The original production data (serialization and hierarchy data) of the original order is still present in the
PDB.It is the responsibility of the system owner to keep the original order data available for starting a reworkprocess.
6.4.11.2 Creating the Rework Module
1. On the sidebar, click System Settings.
2. Click Create/edit device.
3. Click Add.
The window Add new device opens.
4. Enter a device name.
5. From the list Class name: select the entry PCE_ERP_REWORK.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Back.
8. Click Edit device settings.
9. Select the newly created rework device.10. Fill in the following fields:
– 'ip:'
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 123 / 274
– 'port:'– 'user:'
You may use the default admin user for JMS connections from PLM to Glassfish. However, it isrecommended to use a separate user. For further information see PSM Installation Guide, chapter"Configuring Glassfish for Hierarchy Import Module".
– 'password:'The data is defined in the PSM Hierarchy Import Module. The connection to the PSM instance with theJMS queue has to be defined and the PLM needs to be able to connect to the PSM IP and port.
11. Click Save.
6.4.11.3 Workflow
In general, performing a rework order contains the following steps:1. Creating a rework order
See chapter [Creating a Rework Order } Page 125].2. Performing rework
[Performing Rework } Page 126]3. Exporting reworked order data
[Exporting the Order } Page 127]
6.4.11.3.1 Workflow Overview
This chapter describes the general workflow during rework.
① The rework is always started at the PLM. It will create a copy of the original order. The rework process isstarted for the copied order by writing a message to the rework queue.
124 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
② PSM reads the rework queue and triggers the import for each message.
③ The Hierarchy Import Module executes the import of serial numbers and their hierarchy information froma level 4 system like SAP OER. The module validates the data in order to guarantee integrity and mightabort the import if the imported data is not in the expected state.
④ Once the import is finished the PSM will write an answer to the rework response queue regardlesswhether the import was successful or not.
⑤ The PLM processes the answer from the rework response queue.
NOTICECreating Rework OrdersYou must not create another rework order, while the hierarchy import of the last reworkorder is still pending.
6.4.11.3.2 Creating a Rework Order
Precondition• The preconditions listed have been considered. See chapter [Preconditions for Reworking an
Order } Page 123].• PLM is running.• No order is running or suspended in local cache.
Procedure1. On the sidebar, click Production.
2. Click Create Rework order.
3. To identify an original order, enter one or more of the following data either manually or by scanning acode:
– GTIN– sGTIN– Batch– Expiry Date– SSCC– Order NameAll available orders are filtered by the data entered or scanned.
4. Select the order to be reworked from the list.The order details are displayed.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 125 / 274
5. Click Next >.
6. Select the line destination for the rework order.
7. Click Rework order.
A new rework order is created:– Name: Original name plus suffix
Note: By adding the suffix, the order will have a different name than the original order in PLM/PSM.But a link to the original order exists, so the original order name is available for exporting.
– Line and lineformat: Line where you created the rework order.You have to select the line format.
– All other AIs are copied from the original order– Comment: rework of [original name] + original comment.
You can edit the comment.
ResultThe PLM sends the original order-ID and the rework order-ID to the PSM.
You can leave the menu Create Rework order and proceed with other work. The menu Production isavailable again. The rework order is visible, but greyed out. It will be available for production, when theimport is completed.
6.4.11.3.3 Performing Rework
PreconditionThe rework order is available for production.
Procedure1. On the sidebar, click Production.
126 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
2. Click Start production via order.3. Select the rework order from the list.
You can use all manual and automatic operations to verify, decommission, aggregate, deaggregate,and destroy order units that are also available on non-rework orders.
4. Optional: you can perform a manual "unpack all" operation for a parent unit at any rank.This has the effect, that the aggregation steps of all lower ranks are reverted; all parent units up to therank on which "unpack all" was performed are decommissioned. Only the child units of the lowest rankremain commissioned (if the original parent was commissioned before).
5. Optional: You can use both, existing parent units and newly generated ones, to build new hierarchies.6. When the rework is completed, finish the order.
6.4.11.3.4 Exporting the Order
When the rework order is closed, the new serialization and aggregation data can be exported from PSM tothe L4 system either manually or automatically, just any other order.The PSM triggers the rework order export connector to export the rework order. The files that summarize theoperations are created.The interface can distinguish between• Order units that have been imported for rework or have been created during rework.• Imported order units that have been re-inspected or have not been re-inspected during the rework
process.• Parent units whose hierarchy has changed during the rework process and such whose hierarchy
remained untouched.
6.5 Start/Stop Production
NOTICEModules are automatically startedPLM modules are PLM devices that are used for a particular functionality without aconnection to concrete devices. PLM modules are automatically started on the productionstart if the setting 'needDeviceFormat' is not activated or the setting 'needDeviceFormat' isactivated and the module is activated in the line format.
6.5.1 Starting Production via OrderAt this screen the production is started.
1 At the Production settings screen press Start Production via Order.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 127 / 274
2 Select the order you want to start. The following screen appears:
Production > Start production via order
3 Press Next >. The parameters entered will be transferred to the connected units and all occurringincidents will be recorded in a protocol file (order protocol). The following screen appears:
Production > Start production via order > (select order) Next
4 USE BY EXPIRY: At this field use the following date format to input an expiry date: "yyMMdd".
5 Press Start production. The production starts.
NOTICEModules are automatically startedPLM modules are PLM devices that are used for a particular functionality without aconnection to concrete devices. PLM modules are automatically started on the productionstart if the setting 'needDeviceFormat' is not activated or the setting 'needDeviceFormat' isactivated and the module is activated in the line format.
NOTICEMessage "Not enough serial numbers"Before you start production, PLM checks if there are enough serial numbers in thedatabase for your order. If there are not enough serial numbers, a message will pop up.When you click OK, you can still start production. Make sure that there will be enoughserial numbers for your order.
128 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
6 To stop the production press Finish. See chapter [Production Menu during Production } Page 131].After the machine was stopped manually it has to be started manually to resume the production. Startingautomatically is not possible.
NOTICEOnly completed orders are displayedOnly released and completed orders will be available in the list displayed on the screen!
6.5.2 Automatic Production StopWith the following system settings the production is stopped, if the amount of "good" products defined inR06 is reached:• PS02 (Auto Stop Prod. First Rank)• PS03 (Auto Stop Prod. Last Rank)
The first and last ranks are defined automatically on production start. They refer to the first and last rankwith Print Inspection camera where PLM actually produces units. This is required for a Master/Slave linewhere the order data contain the information of all ranks but the Master PLM produces only units for rank 1and 2 and the Slave for rank 3. If both checks are enabled, the respective station will suspend when the setnumber of "good" items is reached. The number of items for the specific rank is calculated based on thelimit R06 and the content size of the units on the involved ranks AI30. The calculation is rounding down thenumber of items to reach the lower number of full units on the checked rank. I.e. for production with ranks1, 3 and 4 and R06 = 9, AI30 on rank 3 is 2, AI30 on rank 4 is 2, the calculated limit for rank 4 is 2pallets (9 / 2 / 2). On the production stop, the warning 05702 "The required quantity for order is reached"is shown. If the amount of good products for one of the configured ranks is reached and the production iscontinued, the modal window with question is shown "The required quantity of X units on rank Y is reached.Do you want to continue?". If the production is continued, no further checks on that rank are applied.
6.5.3 Starting Production via Order > Test RunOnly data from the selected order are used. Serial numbers are assigned but not saved into the database.Press Production > Start production via order. Select the order which contains the valuesyou want to use. The following screen appears:
Production > Start production via order
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 129 / 274
Press Start Test run. The parameters entered will be transferred to the connected units. The followingscreen appears:
Production > Start production via order > (select order) Next
Here you see the test run data.DUE DATE: At this field use the following date format to input an expiry date: „yyMMdd“.
Load test data: Load data for test run, empty fields are filled with sample data to enable the testperformance. Press Start Test run. The test run starts.
To stop the test run press Finish. After the machine was stopped manually it has to be started manuallyto resume the production. Starting automatically is not possible.
6.5.4 Starting Test Run via Line FormatTo check the settings of the line, without wasting serial numbers, a test run can be performed. The counterdata will not be recorded in the data base during a test run. To open the Starting test run screenpress Test run via line format at the [Production Settings Screen } Page 104]. Select the orderwhich contains the values you want to use. The following screen appears:
Production > Test run via line format
Select a line format and press Next. The following screen appears:
130 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Production > Test run via line format > Next
Here you see the Test run data. The following actions are possible:Load test data: Load data for test run, empty fields are filled with sample data to enable the testperformance.Start test run: Start the test production
6.5.5 Production Menu during ProductionWhen an order is running you can perform the following actions:
Production > Test run via line format > Next > Start test run
• Suspend: Stops the production without completing the order. Production can be resumed later, evenafter restarting the PLM.
• Finish: Finish the production (Order will no longer be visible in the order list)Upon completion of production, a batch protocol can be generated, which can be retrieved under ‘Orderresults create report’.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 131 / 274
6.6 SerializationThe serial number is printed to the items as plain text and encrypted at the data matrix code. The serialnumber is always used in conjunction with the GTIN.
6.6.1 Internal Handling of Serial NumbersAt start of production you have to input the count of serial numbers to be used for the serialization.These numbers are saved to the DB and set to status "in use". After starting the production, the serialnumbers are printed sequentially on the items.When the inspection performed by the camera results in a flawless print, the status of the correspondingserial number is set to "true" at the database. If the inspection results in a faulty printer result, the status ofthe corresponding serial number stays on "in use".If an unforeseen interruption of production arises (e.g. due to power failure), all following serial numbersthat were in the intermediate storage of the printer will be discarded. The number of cached serial numbersin the printer is variable and can be set in the printer settings in the printer.Consumption of serial numbers should be limited to physical use, e.g. loss of serial numbers due tobuffering reasons should be as low as possible. Do just buffer reasonable quantity of serial numbers toavoid waste. It is possible to enter or eliminate individual items at the database using a hand scanner.
6.6.2 Serialization Settings at the PLM1 First create a line format, which includes besides the GTIN also a field for serial numbers. See chapter
[Creating a New Line Format } Page 105].
Production > Add/Edit line format > Devices > Wolke Printer tab
132 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
2 From the drop-down menu of the ‘Serial’ field assign the serial number "(21) SERIAL" to the ApplicationIdentifier. Thereby the line format is assigned as serialization.
Production > Add/Edit order (select an order) > Details
3 Press Production > Add/Edit order and select an order.
4 Press Details.
5 Add the field 'SER ALGO' if not existing.6 Assign the desired algorithm to the field 'SER ALGO' (serialization algorithm).7 Enter the desired length of the serial number in the field ‘SER LENGTH’ (maximum 20).
See also2 Post-Production Serial Number Check } Page 135
6.6.3 AlgorithmsINCEach serial number is increased by "1" to the previous one (GS1/PPN coding only)
INC1 …INC999999Each serial number is increased by 1 … 999999 to the previous one (GS1/PPN coding only).
INCRND1 … INCRND999999Each serial number is increased by a random number between 1 … 999999 (both included) to theprevious one (GS1/PPN coding only).
IMPORTThe serial numbers from a list are used, which have previously been imported from a company resourceplanning system (ERP system). (Deprecated: Will be replaced by PCLIST)
PCLISTThe serial numbers from a list are used, which have previously been imported from a company resourceplanning system (ERP system). This algorithm uses (in comparison to "IMPORT") optimized databasestructures within the database.
CHINA(alias of PCLIST) Works exact in the same way as PCLIST
PCRANGEGeneric serial structure for internal or external range management with support for non GS1 conform serialranges
BOLLINISpecial vignette (Italy, Belgium) serial management with start and stop serial and increasing or decreasingnumbers.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 133 / 274
PCALNUM:To have the possibility to test customer requirements. It is possible to define customer specific charactersets for serial numbers in the system setting AC01. The first character is the representation for 0, the secondfor 1, the third for 2 and so on. With this system the numeric numbers in the background get converted tothe defined character set and used as serial number. This would mean, if you enter the characters"ABCDEFGHIJ" at AC01 and use it with the serial number length 6 it would generate the following sequence:1. AAAAAA 2. AAAAAB 3. AAAAAC 4. AAAAADFor the generator the maximum amount of available numbers would be the number of defined characters inAC01 to the power of the defined length. For the example this would mean 10 to the power of 6 whichresults in 1000000 numbers.
PCALNUMRNDTo have the possibility to test customer requirements. It is possible to define customer specific charactersets for serial numbers in the system setting AC01. The first character is the representation for 0, the secondfor 1, the third for 2 and so on. With this system the numeric numbers in the background get converted tothe defined character set and used as serial number. This would mean, if you enter the characters"ABCDEFGHIJ" at AC01 and use it with the serial number length 6 it would generate the following sequence:1. AAAAAA 2. AAAAAB 3. AAAAAC 4. AAAAADThe increase from one serial number to the next would be random.For the generator the maximum amount of available numbers would be the number of defined characters inAC01 to the power of the defined length. For the example this would mean 10 to the power of 6 whichresults in 1000000 numbers.
PCPOOLSee chapter [Post-Production Serial Number Check } Page 135].
UCN(Unique Carton Number) is a set of algorithms for creating serial numbers. They rely on various variablessuch as date and time, line identifier, and others to generate unique serial numbers. UCN serial numbersalways have a fixed length of 20 characters. Currently there are three implementations of the UCNalgorithm: UCN1, UCN2, and UCN-3. They differ mainly in what order the various variables involved areencoded.UCN serial numbers are always generated live at production utilizing runtime information and the fewconfigurable AI values that are described in this section. There is no serial number storage pool in thedatabase that would need to be supplied before production.For use of the UCN serial algorithm, the AI R01 (SER ALGO) has to be set in the order details accordingly.For the different UCN versions / variants the value has to be set as follows:
UCN variant (R01) SER ALGO value Notes1 UCN UCN1 could also be used
2 UCN2
3 UCN-3 The dash (-) is crucial. Without it,due to technical implementationdetails, "UCN3" will fall back toUCN2.
Additionally, the following AIs must be set in the order details:
AI Rank Value Notes17 0 <expiry date>
10 0 <batch/lot>
01 where applicable <GTIN>
R03 where applicable 20 Serial Length, in case ofUCN fixed length: 20
R48 0 <3 digit numeric, i.e.'000'-'999'>
R48 is "Serial extension".In order to use UCN serialnumbers, it must be setto a 3 digit numericalvalue.
134 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
6.6.4 Post-Production Serial Number CheckWith the PCPOOL algorithm the PLM enables a real time one-by-one check of (external) pre-printed serialnumbers against an ERP managed serial number pool. The production stops immediately if a serial couldnot be found or is already marked as used in the ERP pool.
Precondition• Pre- printed serial numbers (China) must be part of a valid/registered imported serial list• PLM checks all items one by one or at case level as part of the case aggregation process• • PLM is working in read only mode without serial number printer• Support for local and non-local cache mode• At start of work order PLM downloads the full global item repository into local cache• At finalization/upload of the work order all used items must be marked as invalid• •Max. repository pool size: 1.000.000 serial numbers per product
Implementation (test setup)• R01 Serial Number Algorithm definition for pre-print / read only check• PLM 4.10 or later with IPC Windows 7 embedded• Local cache download performance for max. pool size < 5min Setup:• Insert the list of China serial numbers (20 digits) into tbl_prodcodenumberslists with reference to R14
PROD CODE REF• Order definition with R01 SER ALGO = PCPOOL; R03 SER LENGTH = 20• Rank 1 camera reads with ReadOnly/Use Wildcards
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 135 / 274
6.7 AggregationAll actions concerning aggregation are recorded automatically into the database. Dependencies betweenaggregation units and serial numbers are recorded. Uniqueness and validity of serial numbers are checkedconstantly across all ranks and actions. This permanent control guarantees traceability of each product andoverview about the whole production line.
6.7.1 Functional Principle of AggregationAggregation is the classification and capture of the smallest units (e.g. folding boxes) to higher-rank units(e.g. bundles, cases and pallets). At each aggregation rank, unambiguous assignment of units to parent-child aggregation ranks is done.The identification of the units is done by printing on the unit itself or by printing on labels which are affixedto the unit. The following example shows the typical aggregation ranks. This example refers to the wholeaggregation chapter to describe the settings.
This chapter refers to the example thereinAt this chapter all settings refer to the following example with four aggregation ranks. If your lineis set up in another way you have to modify the settings accordingly.
1 2 3 4
Item Bundle
CasePallet
Rank:
PLM
Principle of aggregation
At the following table the terms for aggregation units are described for a line with 4 aggregation ranks.
Trade Unit Rank ExplanationItem 1 An item is the smallest unit at the aggregation process. This can be a
folding box, a blister or a bottle for example. It is usually aggregated to abundle or directly to a shipping case.
Bundle 2 A bundle consists of several items.
Case 3 A case is a carton box where either bundles or items directly are packedinto.
Pallet 4 A pallet contains several cases.
Unit 1/2/3/4 A unit is the term for any aggregation rank. The term unit is used for anitem (Rank1), bundle (Rank2), a shipping case (Rank3), or a pallet(Rank4).
The PLM software principally allows up to 8 aggregation ranks (rank1- rank8). Thus it is possible toaggregate an item seven times. The number of aggregation steps depends on the individual line.The aggregation steps can be executed by one of the four stations:• Data Matrix Station (DMS)• Advanced Bundle Station (ABS)
136 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
• Shipping Case Station (SCS)• Manual Aggregation Station (MAS)
Code ReadingAutomatic reading is done by the following devices:• Smart Camera (SMC) – Sequential reading of codes and OCV• High Resolution Camera (HRC) – Simultaneous or sequential reading of codes and OCV• Comparator (VGL) + Laser scanner – Sequential reading of codesManual reading of codes can also be carried out using a hand scanner.
Offset Rank and Child RankAt performing aggregation steps important settings are the ‘offset rank’ and the ‘child rank’. Their meaning islisted at the following table:
Name Explanation Example Setting of exampleOffset Rank The number of the rank
where the labels thathave to be scanned comefrom.
E.g. Items come fromrank1 and have to bebundled at rank2.
Offset rank setting atrank3 station is “rank1”
Child Rank The rank in which theitems that have to beaggregated wereaggregated beforescanning.
E.g. Items come fromrank1, have beenbundled at rank2 andhave to be aggregated toa case at rank3.
Child rank setting atrank3 station is “rank2”
6.7.2 Serialization / Aggregation PreconditionsTo perform Aggregation at the stations the following must be given:• Production is running via order• Aggregation settings have to be made at the PLM and possibly at the corresponding software interface
from camera and printer
6.7.3 Serialization with XMVThe XMV serializes the items by printing all needed information on their labels. Verification of serial numbersand labels is done by the SMC. Serial numbers are saved into the database with status: “verified”. The Itemsare then at rank1. Serialization at the XMV is performed automatically. Serialization is achieved by appro-priate settings at the PLM, the SMC software interface (See chapter [Reader Modes } Page 47]) and theprinter software interface. For examples of serialization/aggregation settings see chapter [AggregationExamples } Page 141].
6.7.4 Aggregation StatusThe aggregation status is the status in which a unit is actually in. In this chapter it is described in whichstatus a unit is in after an aggregation step.Aggregation (Verification, Validation) are usually done automatically by reading devices (scanners, handscanners, cameras, RFID readers).Deaggregation, Decommissioning and commissioning are usually done manually by hand scanners. Forrework purposes, all aggregation steps can also be executed manually by selecting the serial numbers atthe PLM and executing the corresponding function.For every unit there is a serial number needed. So if the terms: item, case, pallet, parent unit or child unitare mentioned, remember that the corresponding serial number and label are always meant, too.
Action Explanation Status Result
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 137 / 274
Print Printed but not verified. Printed=1Verified=0validated=0commissioned=0aggregated=0
Verification
refe
ren
ce
co
de
s
Se
nd
s r
esu
lt:
„re
ad
ab
le“
Printed and recorded to database. Print quality is verified butSN is not yet validated.
Printed=1Verified=1validated= 0commissioned=1aggregated=0/1
Validation
DB
SN is verified and matching with database entry. Printed=1Verified=1validated=1commissioned=1aggregated=0/1
Serialization This comprises print verification and validation of item SN. TheSN is saved to the DB.
Printed=1verified=1validated=1commissioned=1aggregated=0
Aggregation Verified, matching with database entry and aggregated.
a) Creating a parent unit by bundling the needed count of childunits (content size) together. -> E.g.: Item to case: Creating acase by scanning the items. Case label is printed.
b) Adding one or more child units to a incomplete parent unit. -> E.g.: Adding a case to a pallet.
Printed=1Verified=1validated= 1commissioned=1aggregated=1
138 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Deaggregation Removing a child unit from an aggregated parent unit. Thechild unit can be aggregated again. E.g.: Taking a case (childunit) out of a pallet (parent unit).
Printed=1Verified=1validated= 1commissioned=1aggregated=0
Decommission When decommissioning a unit, the unit itself and all associatedchild units are decommissioned. Validated status is set to “0”.When a unit is decommissioned, this means the serial numberstays verified at the database but blocked and it cannot be useduntil it is commissioned again. -> E.g.: There is an aggre-gation; item in bundle in case in pallet. It is subsequently foundthat for some items of the case the wrong folding boxes havebeen used. So the whole pallet is decommissioned and wrongitems can be separated later.
Printed=1Verified=1validated=0commissioned=0aggregated=0/1
Commission Commission is used to unblock units (or serial numbersrespectively) that have been decommissioned before, in orderto reuse it.
Printed=1Verified=1validated=1commissioned=1aggregated=0/1
Destroy Destroy refers to an aggregated unit (items cannot bedestroyed).When destroying a unit, this means the last aggre-gation is reversed (deeper aggregation ranks remain). The labelhas to be discarded and serial number is decommissioned.
Printed=1Verified=1validated= 0commissioned=0aggregated=0
6.7.5 Aggregation with ABSThe ABS aggregates (child) items to (parent) bundles. A HRC sends the (child) serial numbers to the PLMwhich ads it to the bundle. A printer prints a label for the bundle. The label is then checked by a scannerand the bundle serial number is saved into the database with status: “verified”.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 139 / 274
Aggregation at the ABS is done by performing the following steps:
Step Description Explanation1 At the ABS monitor switch from PLM to
HRC AI-CORE using the switch button.Switch button to use the HRC AI-COREInterface
2 Place bundle (not yet aggregated) on theconveyer belt.
Labels facing the camera.
3 Wait until aggregation is done. Scanning, printing, labeling and checkingof the label are done automatically.
The different aggregation possibilities like changing the count of items at a bundle are achieved by appro-priate settings at the PLM and at the corresponding software interfaces of cameras and printers. Forexamples of aggregation settings see chapter [Aggregation Examples } Page 141]. Manual aggregationactions are described in chapter [Manual Aggregation Actions } Page 147].
Number of ColumnsThe HRC at the ABS takes a photo of every column of items in a bundle and the HRC AI-CORE merges theseto one picture. At the following example the bundle has four columns, so four photos are taken.
Bundle Dimensions
To calculate the time points when the photos have to be taken, the ABS needs the measures of the bundlesand the measures of the items as well as the number of columns. The number of columns has to be enteredunder the PLC system settings and there at the parameter ‘Number of Columns’.
6.7.6 Aggregation with SCSThe SCS aggregates (child) items or bundles to (parent) cases. A manually triggered HRC sends the (child)serial numbers to the PLM which ads it to the case. A printer prints a label for the case. The label is thenchecked by a hand scanner and the case serial number is saved into the database with status: “verified”.Aggregation at the SCS is done by performing the following steps:
Step Description Explanation1 At the SCS monitor switch from PLM to
HRC AI-COREsoftware using the switchbutton.
Switch button to use the HRC AI-COREInterface
2 Place units equal to the number of itemsof a shipping case into the shipping caseon the SCS table.
Place shipping case centered at thecamera screen.
140 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
3 Press foot pedal to take a picture of thefolding boxes.
An image is captured; Green boxes areplace around data matrix code; a bluelight is displayed confirming the aggre-gation; a case label is printed automat-ically from the printer
4 Verify the case label barcode by scanningit with the SCS hand scanner.
The unit is verified at the database.
The different aggregation possibilities are achieved by appropriate settings at the PLM and at the corre-sponding software interfaces of cameras and printers. Examples for aggregation settings see chapter[Aggregation Examples } Page 141]. Manual aggregation actions are described in chapter [ManualAggregation Actions } Page 147].
6.7.7 Aggregation with MASThe MAS aggregates (child) cases, bundles or items to (parent) pallets. A hand scanner sends the (child)serial numbers to the PLM which ads it to the pallet. A printer prints a label for the pallet. The label is thenchecked by a hand scanner and the pallet serial number is saved into the database with status: “verified”.Aggregation at the MAS is done by performing the following steps:
Step Description Explanation1 At the MAS monitor switch from PLM to
HRC AI-CORE using the switch button.Switch button to use the HRC AI-COREInterface
2 Use case hand scanner and scan thelabels of the cases you want toaggregate.
After scanning the number of cases equalto the predefined content size (AI37), thelabel for the pallet will be printed automat-ically.
3 Use pallet hand scanner and scan thelabel of the pallet to verify it.
The pallet label is verified.
The different aggregation possibilities are achieved by appropriate settings at the PLM and at the corre-sponding software interfaces of cameras and printers. Examples for aggregation settings you find at chapter[Aggregation Examples } Page 141]. Manual aggregation actions are described in chapter [ManualAggregation Actions } Page 147].
6.7.8 Aggregation ExamplesIn this chapter the most common examples of aggregation are described. All settings given here refer to theexample with four aggregation ranks. If your line is set up in another way you have to modify the settingsaccordingly.All aggregation stations can aggregate the previous unit by scanning the labels from the previous unit or byscanning the labels from lower units. This means; for example if you have aggregated three ranks (item,bundle, case) it is possible to aggregate the case (rank3) to the pallet (rank4) by scanning the labels of thecase or by scanning the label of the bundle or by scanning the labels of the items.
General Settings:For all examples the following settings (edit at System Settings > Edit Device Settings) are thesame:• The serialization printer (printer of the DMS) is set to Printer Mode: BUFFERED_PRINTER• The serialization reader (SMC of the DMS) is set to Reader Mode: PRINT_INSPECTION• The aggregation printers (printer of ABS, SCS, MAS) are set to Printer Mode: AGGREGATE_PRINTER• The aggregation readers (reader of ABS, SCS, MAS) are set to Reader Mode: AGGREGATE_READER• Global Scanners are set to Reader Mode: PRINT_INSPECTION• Aggregation Scanners are set to Reader Mode: AGGREGATE_READER• When using SSCC numbers for incomplete units see chapter [Handling Incomplete Units } Page 149]
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 141 / 274
6.7.8.1 Item - Bundle - Case (by Reading Bundle Labels) - Pallet
Here it is described how to aggregate items to bundles to case (by reading the codes of the bundle labels)to pallet. See the following figure:
2 4
SMC
Serialnumbers
001110101111100101000110111 0 10100100 101010001111
011 011011
011101011100110111011110110111001010110100101010001101111
DB
Se
nd
s p
rin
t jo
b
SMC
Se
nd
s r
ef.
co
de
s
(PL
M c
om
pa
res it)
1
Se
nd
s b
ack r
esu
lts
Se
nd
s b
ack r
esu
lts
ScannerScannerScannerScanner
PLM
DMS (Item) ABS (Bundle) SCS (Case) MAS (Pallet)
3
Sends r
ef.codes
Se
nd
s r
ef.
co
de
s
(PL
M c
om
pa
res it)
Sends p
rint jo
b
Sends r
ef.codes
Sends b
ack r
esults
Se
nd
s r
ef.
co
de
s
(PL
M c
om
pa
res it)
Se
nd
s p
rin
t jo
b
Sends r
ef. c
odes
Se
nd
s p
rin
t jo
b
Printer
Printer Printer Printer
ScannerScannerScannerScannerHRC
Item - Bundle - Case (by reading bundle labels) - Pallet
At all aggregation stations (ABS, SCS and MAS) the labels of the units aggregated before are read. This isthe most frequently used procedure.
For this example you have to make the following settings:
Station Where to edit Settings ExplanationDMS At start of the production or at
the order or at the productEnter agg. GTIN for rank2 One GTIN for each rank
At the line format Enter item dimensions
- Offset rank= -
Child rank= -
ABS At start of the production or atthe order or at the product
Enter agg. GTIN for rank2 One GTIN for each rank
At the product and at the PLC Enter item and bundledimensions
Production > Edit Line Format> Devices (HRC, laserscanner)
Offset rank=1 Before scanning is done, thelabels that have to be scannedare aggregated at = rank1(DMS)
Child rank=1 The labels that have to bescanned come from = rank1(DMS)
See chapter [Aggregation withABS } Page 139]
Number of layers As high as count of items inturn
142 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
SCS At start of the production or atthe order or at the product
Enter agg. GTIN for rank3 One GTIN for each rank
At the product and at the PLC Enter case dimensions
Production > Edit Line Format> Devices (HRC, handscanner)
Offset Rank=2 Before scanning is done, thelabels that have to be scannedare aggregated at = rank2(ABS)
Child Rank=2 The labels that have to bescanned come from = rank2(ABS)
MAS At start of the production or atthe order or at the product
Enter agg. GTIN for rank4 One GTIN for each rank
Production > Edit Line Format> Devices (hand scanners)
Offset Rank=3 Before scanning is done, thelabels that have to be scannedare aggregated at = rank3(SCS)
Child Rank=3 The labels that have to bescanned come from = rank3(SCS)
6.7.8.2 Item - Bundle - Case (by Reading Item Label) - Pallet
Here it is described how to aggregate items to bundles to case (by reading the codes of the items) to pallet.Performing this aggregation leads to the same result as scanning the bundle labels; the bundles areaggregated to the case. See the following figure:
2 4
SMC
Serialnumbers
001110101111100101000110111 0 10100100 101010001111
011 011011
011101011100110111011110110111001010110100101010001101111
DB
Sends p
rint jo
b
SMC
Sends r
ef.codes
(PLM
com
pare
s it)
1
Sends b
ack r
esults
Sends b
ack r
esults
ScannerScannerScannerScanner
PLM
DMS (Item) ABS (Bundle) SCS (Case) MAS (Pallet)
3
Se
nd
s r
ef.
co
de
s
Se
nd
s r
ef.
co
de
s
(PL
M c
om
pa
res it)
Se
nd
s p
rin
t jo
b
Se
nd
s r
ef.
co
de
s
Se
nd
s b
ack r
esu
lts
Se
nd
s r
ef.
co
de
s
(PL
M c
om
pa
res it)
Se
nd
s p
rin
t jo
b
Sends r
ef. c
odes
Se
nd
s p
rin
t jo
b
Printer
Printer Printer Printer
ScannerScannerScannerScannerHRC
Item - Bundle - Case (by reading item label) - Pallet
At the SCS (rank3) the item labels from the DMS (Rank1) are read instead of the bundle labels from the ABS(rank2). This can be useful if it is not possible to capture the bundle labels when the bundles are packedinto the case.For this example you have to make the following settings:
Station Where to edit Settings Explanation
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 143 / 274
DMS At start of the production or atthe order or at the product
Enter agg. GTIN for rank2 One GTIN for each rank
At the product and at the PLC Enter item dimensions
Offset rank= -
Child rank= -
ABS At start of the production or atthe order or at the product
Enter agg. GTIN for rank2 One GTIN for each rank
At the product and at the PLC Enter item and bundledimensions
Production > Edit Line Format> Devices (HRC, laserscanner)
Offset rank=1 Before scanning is done, thelabels that have to be scannedare aggregated at = rank1(DMS)
Child rank=1 The labels that have to bescanned come from = rank1(DMS)
See chapter [Aggregation withABS } Page 139]
Number of layers As high as count of items inturn
SCS At start of the production or atthe order or at the product
Enter agg. GTIN for rank3 One GTIN for each rank
At the product and at the PLC Enter case dimensions
Production > Edit Line Format> Devices (HRC, handscanner)
Offset Rank=2 Before scanning is done, thelabels that have to be scannedare aggregated at = rank2(ABS)
Child Rank=1 The labels that have to bescanned come from = rank1(DMS)
MAS At start of the production or atthe order or at the product
Enter agg. GTIN for rank4 One GTIN for each rank
Production > Edit Line Format> Devices (hand scanners)
Offset Rank=3 Before scanning is done, thelabels that have to be scannedare aggregated at = rank3(ABS)
Child Rank=3 The labels that have to bescanned come from = rank3(ABS)
144 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
6.7.8.3 Item - Case - Pallet
Here it is described how to aggregate items to case to pallet without having bundles. See the followingfigure:
2 4
SCA
Serial numbers
001110101111100101000110111 0 10100100 101010001111
011 011011
011101011100110111011110110111001010110100101010001101111
DB
Se
nd
s p
rin
t jo
b
SCA
Se
nd
s re
f.c
od
es
(PL
M c
om
pa
res
it)
1
Se
nd
s b
ac
k r
esu
lts
Se
nd
s b
ac
k r
esu
lts
ScannerScannerScannerScanner
PLM
DMS (Item) ABS (Bundle) SCS (Case) MAS (Pallet)
3
Se
nd
s re
f.c
od
es
Se
nd
s p
rin
t jo
b
Se
nd
s re
f.c
od
es
Se
nd
s b
ac
k r
esu
lts
Se
nd
s re
f.c
od
es
(PL
M c
om
pa
res
it)
Se
nd
s p
rin
t jo
b
Se
nd
s re
f.c
od
es
Se
nd
s b
ac
k r
esu
lts
Se
nd
s re
f. c
od
es
Se
nd
s p
rin
t jo
b
Printer
Printer Printer Printer
ScannerScannerScannerScannerSCA
Se
nd
s b
ac
k r
esu
lts
Se
nd
s re
f. c
od
es
Item - Case - Pallet
The ABS (rank2) is not used. Note that rank2 still exists. This has to be considered at the line settings.For this example you have to make the following settings:
Station Where to edit Settings ExplanationDMS At start of the production or at
the order or at the productEnter agg. GTIN for rank2 One GTIN for each rank
At the product and at the PLC Enter item dimensions
At System Settings > EditDevice Settings
Offset rank= -
Child rank= -
ABS - - ABS is not used
SCS At start of the production or atthe order or at the product
Enter agg. GTIN for rank3 One GTIN for each rank
At the product and at the PLC Enter case dimensions
Production > Edit Line Format> Devices (HRC, laserscanner)
Offset Rank=1 Before scanning is done, thelabels that have to be scannedare aggregated at = rank1(DMS)
Child Rank=1 The labels that have to bescanned come from = rank1(DMS)
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 145 / 274
MAS At start of the production or atthe order or at the product
Enter agg. GTIN for rank4 One GTIN for each rank
Production > Edit Line Format> Devices (hand scanners)
Offset Rank=3 Before scanning is done, thelabels that have to be scannedare aggregated at = rank3(ABS)
Child Rank=3 The labels that have to bescanned come from = rank3(ABS)
6.7.8.4 Item - Pallet
Here it is described how to aggregate items to pallet without having bundles or shipping cases. See thefollowing figure:
2 4
SCA
Serial numbers
001110101111100101000110111 0 10100100 101010001111
011 011011
011101011100110111011110110111001010110100101010001101111
DBS
en
ds
pri
nt
job
SCA
Se
nd
s re
f.c
od
es
(PL
M c
om
pa
res
it)
1
Se
nd
s b
ac
k r
esu
lts
Se
nd
s b
ac
k r
esu
lts
ScannerScannerScannerScanner
PLM
DMS (Item) ABS (Bundle) SCS (Case) MAS (Pallet)
3
Se
nd
s re
f.c
od
es
Se
nd
s re
f.c
od
es
(PL
M c
om
pa
res
it)
Se
nd
s p
rin
t jo
b
Se
nd
s re
f.c
od
es
Se
nd
s b
ac
k r
esu
lts
Se
nd
s re
f.c
od
es
(PL
M c
om
pa
res
it)
Se
nd
s p
rin
t jo
b
Se
nd
s re
f.c
od
es
Se
nd
s b
ac
k r
esu
lts
Se
nd
s re
f. c
od
es
Se
nd
s p
rin
t jo
b
Printer
Printer Printer Printer
ScannerScannerScannerScannerMPC
Item - Pallet
The ABS (rank2) and the SCS (rank3) are not used. Note that rank2 and rank3 still exist. This has to beconsidered at the line settings.For this example you have to make the following settings:
Station Where to edit Settings ExplanationDMS At start of the production or at
the order or at the productEnter agg. GTIN for rank2 One GTIN for each rank
At the product and at the PLC Enter item dimensions
At System Settings > EditDevice Settings
Offset rank=-
Child rank=-
ABS - - ABS is not used
SCS - - SCS is not used
146 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
MAS At start of the production or atthe order or at the product
Enter agg. GTIN for rank4 One GTIN for each rank
Production > Edit Line Format> Devices (hand scanners)
Offset Rank=1 Before scanning is done, thelabels that have to be scannedare aggregated at = rank1(DMS)
Child Rank=1 The labels that have to bescanned come from = rank1(DMS)
6.7.9 Manual Aggregation ActionsAt the PLM you can perform the following manual aggregations. When performing manual aggregationactions the production must be running. Aggregation and deaggregation are fully traceable by storingdependencies of parent and child unit GTINs and serial numbers into the database.
Finish manual aggregation before closing an orderDo not finish an order before performing the manual aggregation. Production must be runningwhen performing manual aggregation. Otherwise incomplete units being at the cache have tobe discarded.
6.7.9.1 Destroying Parent Label (Reversing Aggregation)
It is possible to reverse the aggregation of a unit (pallet / case / bundle). In order to do this you have to“destroy” the unit label. The unit label is no longer useable and should be discarded. The child units/Itemsare thereby released and are assigned to the lower rank again.To destroy a parent label, proceed as follows:Press Home > Global hand scanner > show hierarchy > (Scan product with global hand scanner) >destroy (See the following figure)
Home > Global hand scanner > show hierarchy > (Scan product with global hand scanner)
6.7.9.2 Deleting Parent/Child Relation (deaggregate)
To delete the relation between a child unit and a parent unit (when deleting a case from a pallet or abundle from a case or an item from a bundle) you have to deaggregate the child rank. Then the selectedchild unit is released (orphaned) and can be aggregated again. If a new parent label with GTIN / serialnumber is printed immediately or not, depends on the system settings of the PLM. To deaggregate a rankproceeds as follows:Press Home > (Select Global hand scanner) > Show hierarchy > (Scan unit orselect unit within the hierarchy tree) > Deaggregate
The unit gets orphaned but stays valid in the database.
6.7.9.3 Suspending an Order
To suspend an order to continue it later proceeds as follows:
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 147 / 274
Press Production > suspend.
Production and batch are then suspended and can be continued. The order will stay suspended, even aftershutdown and restart of the system you can continue the order.
Note: If you want to produce another order between suspend and continue of the order, you need aconnection to the global database. If you only have connection to the local database (cache mode) it is notpossible to produce another order in between.
6.7.9.4 Finishing an Order Before it is completed
To complete an order before the maximum number of items is reached proceed as follows:Press Production > finish. Confirm with Yes.
The batch is then finished.
6.7.9.5 Commissioning and Decommissioning a Unit
It is possible to commission or decommission a unit (item, bundle, case or pallet). When decommis-sioning, the serial number(s) will still be stored at the database but tagged as “invalid” and no longerusable. When decommissioning a parent rank the child ranks are also decommissioned but the relationbetween the units still exists.To decommission a unit, proceed as follows:Press Home > Global hand scanner > show Hierarchy > (Scan unit with global handscanner) > decommission
To commission a unit, proceed as follows:Press Home > Global hand scanner > show Hierarchy > (Scan unit with global handscanner) > commission (See the following figure)
Home > Global hand scanner > show hierarchy > (Scan product with global hand scanner)
6.7.9.6 Closing an Incomplete Unit (partial case)
It is possible to complete a unit before max number of items is reached. To close a case during productionis running, press Home > global hand scanner > show aggregation > (choose rank) >Close. The unit is then closed.
It is possible to create a partial case with an SCS:1. Press the foot pedal to take a picture of the case with the (incomplete) folding boxes.2. Press the button Case Complete.
3. Confirm error message "xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx" with the button Confirm.
4. Close the case with xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
6.7.9.7 Viewing Aggregation Rank of a Unit
To view the aggregation rank of a unit (item, bundle, case or pallet) proceed as follows:
148 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Press home > Global hand scanner > show hierarchy > (scan with global handscanner). (See following figure)
Home > Global hand scanner > show hierarchy > (Scan product with global hand scanner)
The rank is then displayed.
6.7.9.8 Re-printing a Label with same SN or Different SN
You can re-print labels of the current batch for a bundle, a case or a pallet - with a different serial number or- with same serial number. How your re-print works has to be determined at the system settings. Go toSystem Settings > Edit System Settings and change the parameter ‘Reprint new serial’.
To re-print a label, proceed as follows:Press Home > global hand scanner > show hierarchy > (scan or select product) >print label (See following figure)
Home > Global hand scanner > show hierarchy > (Scan product with global hand scanner)
6.7.9.9 Handling Incomplete Units
The handling of incomplete units depends on the printer settings. There are three possibilities to produce:
Kind of Code Explanationa Only GTINs, only complete units When producing only with GTINs all
incomplete units being at the cache arediscarded.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 149 / 274
b GTIN for complete units, SSCC forincomplete units
When producing with GTINs and SSCC allincomplete units being at the cache getan SSCC number. Incomplete units haveto be scanned to verify their aggregationand afterwards they have to be ‘closed’.
c Only SSCCs for complete and incompleteunits
When producing only with SSCC allincomplete units being at the cache getan SSCC number. Incomplete units haveto be scanned to verify their aggregationand afterwards they have to be ‘closed’.
If a GTIN, a SSCC or both is printed, this can be defined at each rank individually. This has to be set in theprinter settings at the line format. The needed AIs are:• GTIN: 01-21• GTIN+SSCC: 01-21-00• SSCC: 00At the field ‘DMX’ select ##DMX enter the AIs as follows:
Kind of Code AIsOnly GTINs, only complete units 01-21
GTIN for complete units, SSCC for incomplete units 01-21-00
Only SSCCs for complete and incomplete units 00
Part without square brackets defines the valuesprinted on DMX for complete units. Part in squarebrackets defines the content for incomplete units.
01-21-17-10[00-02-17-37]
See also chapter [Special Barcode Configuration in the Label } Page 107].
6.7.9.10 Run Testorder with Imported GTIN
Prerequisite: The parameter "ES01 (ERP SN Ranges)" has to be activated under system settings >edit system settings.
1. Add GTIN Number for Rank1, 2 and 3.2. Create a new Order (see chapter [Adding a New Order } Page 119])3. Assign GTIN and Company Prefix to the order. Add a field for GTIN at the Order Details Dialog. (seechapter [Adding Order Details } Page 121])Use Values:• Rank 0: (Global) add R05 (Company prefix) with value “Text”• Rank 1: (Item) add 01(GTIN) with GTIN for rank1, created in step 1)• Rank 2: (Bundle) add 01(GTIN) with GTIN for rank2, created in step 1)• Rank 3: (Case) add 01(GTIN) with GTIN for rank3, created in step 1)4. Import GTIN ranges for all GTINs created in step one.5. Run test order (see chapter [Starting Production via Order > Test Run } Page 129])Use Values:• Order: Use order (created in step 2).• Serial number Generator: SGTINGenerator6. Set Order State to ‘3 FINISHED’ (see chapter [Start/Stop Production } Page 127])7. Export Order, Go to Management > Order Management > Order Export. Select order (created in step 2)and click Export.
6.7.10 Manual Aggregation by Scanning a BarcodeManual aggregation actions can be performed faster by scanning a barcode that leads to the correspondingmenu.
6.7.10.1 Creating a Barcode Command
It is possible to create a barcode individually via the website mentioned below.
150 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
1. Go to http://www.morovia.com/free-online-barcode-generator/
2. Select “GS1-128 (UCC/EAN-128)” within the field “Barcode Format”.3. Enter desired code of the following list (Example: “(99)&9000” for “Show information”) within the field“Data to Encode”.4. Select desired x-dimension, bar height, rotation and if human readable text should be displayed.5. Select “Submit”.
6.7.10.2 List of Commands
The GS1 list of commands for barcodes contains a code for each data to encode in accordance with theGS1 Standard. Use a code to create barcode with the corresponding function.
Code GS1-128 Command Rank(99)&0000 Unknown 0
(99)&0001 Automode 0
(99)&0100 Add Unit 0
(99)&0111 Commission 0
(99)&0200 Add external 0
(99)&0400 Destroy 0
(99)&0500 Reprint Label 0
(99)&0900 Close Exist 0
(99)&0910 Verify Unit 0
(99)&0950 Deaggregate 0
(99)&0999 Decommission 0
(99)&9000 Show Information 0
(99)&9001 Show Aggregation 0
(99)&9002 Show Hierarchy 0
(99)&2000 Create Rank 2 2
(99)&2010 Open Exist Rank 2 2
(99)&2020 Open Child Rank 2 2
(99)&2100 Add Unit To Rank 2 2
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 151 / 274
Code GS1-128 Command Rank(99)&2200 Add Ext To Rank 2 2
(99)&2900 Close Rank 2 2
(99)&2910 Close Exist Rank 2 2
(99)&2940 Remove Cache Rank 2 2
(99)&2950 Deaggregate Rank 2 2
(99)&2960 Add Unit Helper Code to Rank 2Can be used in automatic and manual mode of the device.Child rank is always aggregation rank -1.
2
(99)&3000 Create Rank 3 3
(99)&3010 Open Exist Rank 3 3
(99)&3020 Open Child Rank 3 3
(99)&3100 Add Unit To Rank 3 3
(99)&3200 Add Ext To Rank 3 3
(99)&3900 Close Rank 3 3
(99)&3910 Close Exist Rank 3 3
(99)&3940 Remove Cache Rank 3 3
(99)&3950 Deaggregate Rank 3 3
(99)&3960 Add Unit Helper Code to Rank 3Can be used in automatic and manual mode of the device.Child rank is always aggregation rank -1.
3
(99)&4000 Create Rank 4 4
(99)&4010 Open Exist Rank 4 4
(99)&4020 Open Child Rank 4 4
(99)&4100 Add Unit To Rank 4 4
(99)&4200 Add Ext To Rank 4 4
(99)&4900 Close Rank 4 4
(99)&4910 Close Exist Rank 4 4
(99)&4940 Remove Cache Rank 4 4
(99)&4950 Deaggregate Rank 4 4
(99)&4960 Add Unit Helper Code to Rank 4Can be used in automatic and manual mode of the device.Child rank is always aggregation rank -1.
4
(99)&5000 Create Rank 5 5
(99)&5010 Open Exist Rank 5 5
(99)&5020 Open Child Rank 5 5
(99)&5100 Add Unit To Rank 5 5
(99)&5200 Add Ext To Rank 5 5
(99)&5900 Close Rank 5 5
(99)&5910 Close Exist Rank 5 5
(99)&5940 Remove Cache Rank 5 5
(99)&5950 Deaggregate Rank 5 5
(99)&5960 Add Unit Helper Code to Rank 5Can be used in automatic and manual mode of the device.Child rank is always aggregation rank -1.
5
(99)&6000 Create Rank 6 6
(99)&6010 Open Exist Rank 6 6
(99)&6020 Open Child Rank 6 6
(99)&6100 Add Unit To Rank 6 6
152 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Code GS1-128 Command Rank(99)&6200 Add Ext To Rank 6 6
(99)&6900 Close Rank 6 6
(99)&6910 Close Exist Rank 6 6
(99)&6940 Remove Cache Rank 6 6
(99)&6950 Deaggregate Rank 6 6
(99)&6960 Add Unit Helper Code to Rank 6Can be used in automatic and manual mode of the device.Child rank is always aggregation rank -1.
6
(99)&7000 Create Rank 7 7
(99)&7010 Open Exist Rank 7 7
(99)&7020 Open Child Rank 7 7
(99)&7100 Add Unit To Rank 7 7
(99)&7200 Add Ext To Rank 7 7
(99)&7900 Close Rank 7 7
(99)&7910 Close Exist Rank 7 7
(99)&7940 Remove Cache Rank 7 7
(99)&7950 Deaggregate Rank 7 7
(99)&7960 Add Unit Helper Code to Rank 7Can be used in automatic and manual mode of the device.Child rank is always aggregation rank -1.
7
(99)&8000 Create Rank 8 8
(99)&8010 Open Exist Rank 8 8
(99)&8020 Open Child Rank 8 8
(99)&8100 Add Unit To Rank 8 8
(99)&8200 Add Ext To Rank 8 8
(99)&8900 Close Rank 8 8
(99)&8910 Close Exist Rank 8 8
(99)&8940 Remove Cache Rank 8 8
(99)&8950 Deaggregate Rank 8 8
(99)&8960 Add Unit Helper Code to Rank 8Can be used in automatic and manual mode of the device.Child rank is always aggregation rank -1.
8
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 153 / 274
6.7.10.3 Commonly used Barcodes
Show Information Decommission
Show Aggregation Commission
Show Hierarchy Deaggregate
Verify Unit Reprint Label
Add Unit Destroy
6.8 Troubleshooting
6.8.1 Treating Products after an InterruptionWhen an error makes a product unusable e.g. squeezed packaging, proceed as follows:
Serialized products: Check all printed products you wish to discard with a hand scanner. Serializedproducts have to be "decommissioned" (see chapter [Commissioning and Decommissioning aUnit } Page 148]).
Unprinted products: When a product is not yet printed you can discard it without scanning it.
154 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Not scanned products: If a product is printed but not scanned you can discard it without scanning it.
6.8.2 Avoiding Waste of Items after an InterruptionAt the serialization process, the PLM sends a serial number to the printer. The printer prints the serialnumber and the PLM sends the same serial number to the reader (camera, RFID reader,…) which validatesit. The sequence of printed serial numbers has to be consistent with the sequence of read serial numbers. Ifthe production is interrupted and the conveyer has been stopped, there are always some items betweenprinter and reader which have to be discarded because their serial numbers were deleted from the PLMcache, so they will not be sent to the camera for validation after restart.The “use wildcard” function allows continuing the production after interruption without having to discard theleft items. This is done by checking only the attendance of a serial number without validating it. Validationis then done by the PLM.
6.8.2.1 Use Wildcards globally for all Line Formats
'useWildcards' is only for serialized productsThe ‘useWildcards’ feature is only applicable for serialized products. This feature is notapplicable for standard print verification or aggregation verification.
If you wish to use the wildcard feature generally for all line formats of a line, activate the ‘useWildcards’function at the system settings of the reader. See figure below:
System Settings > Edit device settings > (Select Reader) > Set checkmark at “use Wildcards”, press Save
Thus, whenever the reader is activated it will use wildcards for the serial number. The length for the serialnumber has to be defined in the order or in the product at the Application Identifier ‘R03, SER LENGTH’.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 155 / 274
6.8.2.2 Use Wildcards Line Format Specific
If you wish to use the wildcard feature only for an individual line format, not for all line formats, you have toenter asterisks (*) as wildcards into the field for serial numbers at the line format. Put these asterisks intothe serial number field instead of the serial number. Go to the following screen:
Production > Add/Edit line format > (Select line format) > Devices > (select reader) > (set checkmark at the ‘Activated’field) > (Select empty field at DM0)
Select the empty entry (first entry) at the first column next to the field for the serial number (in the example‘DMO’). At the second column, enter asterisks for the serial number as wildcards:
Production > Add/Edit line format > (Select line format) > Devices > (Select empty field) > Enter asterisks
Enter as many asterisks as long the serial number is. E.g. for an 8-digit serial number enter 8 asterisks.Press Save to save the settings.When producing with this line format, only the attendance of a number with the right length (In the example8 digits) is checked by the camera.
Wildcard for SN in Code with several AIsIf there is a code containing several AIs, including the serial number; for the serial number wildcards can beused. Code fields are the fields with a double hash (#) in front of it:(##) DMX(##BC) BARCODE 128(##HR) HUMAN READABLE(##RF) RFID EPC
156 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Example:
AIs to check at the DMX Code Input into the DM0field
Meaning
GTIN (01); SERIAL (21); USE BY OREXPIRY (17); BATCH/LOT (10)
01-21(********)-17-10
Eight Asterisks behind the AI21 means theserial number is eight characters long.
In the example above, the fields 01; 17 and 10 are checked. The serial number (21) can be variable but ischecked to be 8-digit.
6.8.3 HRC Offset is too largeIndication / Error Message: The screen at the HRC AI-CORE software from ABS looks as shown below.
Description:The bundle image at the ABS is made by a HRC which takes multiple photos in sequence that are puttogether by the camera software. If the offset is too large the photo at the screen will look something like thefollowing:
Offset is too large
At the screen the first photo is displayed at the left and the second photo is displayed at the right. Thebundles move from the right to the left (point of view of the camera). At the left (first photo) the first twoitems are cut and the code of the second two items is captured. At the right (second photo) the second twoitems are cut.
Solution:Both items have to be centered at the screen. Decrease offset of the HRC.
Action: Press Production > Add/Edit Line Format > ABS PLC
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 157 / 274
Estimate offset (in mm) on basis of the screen photo. Subtract offset from the actual value at the ‘offset’ fieldand enter lower value. Start production and test the new offset. If necessary, repeat these steps till items areat the screen.
Offset is good
6.8.4 Printer Offset is too Large / SmallIndication / Error Message: Label is protruding from the bundle.
Description:The printer of the ABS applies the label on the bundle. If the offset is too small, the label is tagged to earlyon the bundle; if it is too large the label is tagged too late on the bundle.
Solution:The label has to be centered at the bundle.
Action: Press Production > Add/Edit Line Format > Choose line format > Devices > (SelectABS PLC)
Estimate offset (in mm). Subtract offset from the actual value at the ‘offset’ field and enter new value. Startproduction and test the new offset. If necessary, repeat these steps till bundles are centered at the screen.
6.8.5 Ejector Offset is too Large / SmallIndication / Error Message: Ejection of erroneous bundle is triggered too early / too late.
Description:Bundles with erroneous labels are ejected automatically by the ejector. If the ejector is triggered too early /too late the ejection can fail.
Solution:The ejector offset has to be adjusted to the right value.
Action: Press System settings > edit device settings > ABS PLC > Teach
Estimate offset (in mm). Subtract offset from the actual value at the field ‘Offset Eject’ and enter new value.Start production and test the new offset. If necessary, repeat these steps till ejection works properly.
6.8.6 Scanner Offset is too Large / SmallIndication / Error Message: Camera and printer offset are adjusted correctly but the bundle is ejected after reading. At the ABS scannerthe LED lights red instead of green.
158 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Description:If the scanner offset is too large, scanning of the label is performed to late; if it is too small, scanning of thelabel is performed to early. The label will not be captured and ejected.
Solution:The scanner offset has to be adjusted to the right value.
Action: Press Production > Add/Edit Line Format > ABS PLC
Estimate offset (in mm). Subtract/add offset from/to the actual value at the ‘offset’ field and enter lower/higher value. Start production and test the new offset. If necessary, repeat this procedure till scanning isdone correctly, the LED lights green, the bundle is not ejected.
6.8.7 “Processing Timeout” at the HRC AI-CORE (SCS)Indication / Error Message:After taking an image with the HRC at the SCS an error message is displayed: “Processing Timeout”. See thefollowing figure:
Error Message: "Processing timeout"
Description: Camera needs more time to analyze the image than timeout is set to. Factors are:• Sequence of analysis of the image• Timeout value• Size of analyzed frame
Solution / Action:Position case at the lower right of the analyzed frame• Option: The HRC software starts analyzing the image at the lower right and ends analyzing at the upper
left. Positioning the case at the lower right can accelerate the reading. See the following figure:
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 159 / 274
Positioning items at the lower right
• Result: Relevant areas are analyzed earlier, timeout is not reached.• Action: Position the case at the lower right of the analyzed frame.• Note: This refers to the analyzed area of the screen image this may be only a part of the whole screen if
the frame is set this way. Refer to the HRC software manual (“Select part Image” function).
Change size of the analyzed frame• Option: Change size of the analyzed frame if the current area is larger than the needed area.• Result: Camera software needs less to analyze, timeout is not reached.• Action: Position the items at a suitable position and set frame at the HRC software. Switch to the HRC
software interface and press Camera menu -> Log on > Stop> Tolerances > camerasettings > Select Image part (set window around the case position) Also refer tothe HRC software manual (“Select part Image” function).
Set frame of the analyzed area
160 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
When taking a new picture the screen will show only the analyzed area and looks as follows:
Frame of the analyzed area
Change timeout• Option: Change timeout to a higher value if production speed allows this.• Result: Analyzing time is below timeout, timeout is not reached.• Action: Refer to the HRC software manual.
6.9 Device Options during ProductionDuring Production the Home screen (press Home) provides an overview of the available devices as visualpresentation of the shift register (see below). From this screen you get to the device settings menus. For thispress the corresponding bars. The screens of the devices and their usage are described in the followingchapters. The following figure shows the Home screen:
Home (while production is running)
Pos. Name Function1 Device Status Bars The main menu of the PCE Line Manager always remains
visible. All operating elements available are displayed in orderto be able to change between the program functions(depending on the authorization level of the user
2 Counters (Good/Bad/Overall) counters of the devices attached
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 161 / 274
Refer to the operating instructions of each deviceFor the complete functional range of the individual devices please refer to the respectiveoperating instructions.
6.9.1 Smart CameraClass name: PCE_SMCThe PCE image processing system is operated using simple menu navigation on the display and with theintegrated touch screen. The areas to be inspected are marked and verified using the window technique;operating instructions are displayed for the single products. The fields defined in the camera are used in theline format.
Getting to the main menuWhen the system is switched on, the production run – the actual evaluation mode is started. Toget to the main menu of the camera, select the camera, press MENU and quit the productionrun.
From the camera main menu you can edit all smart camera settings (See Smart Camera operatingmanual).
Home > Smart Camera
For setting the control windows (OCV, OCR, Code, etc.) see chapter [Smart Camera } Page 51].
6.9.2 Check of Serial NumberReading numbers and checking is done by the camera. Every individual serial number is checked againstthe pattern by the camera. If a serial number does not fit to those commissioned in the system, an errormessage is send to the PLM.
162 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
6.9.3 High Resolution CameraThis screen shows the results of the HRC AI-CORE and is for display purposes only.
Home > HRC (during production)
If you would like to use the HRC, press HRC in the main menu.
Note:Switch from PLM to HRC AI-CORE using the switch button.
6.9.4 Hand Scanner
Home > hand scanner (during production)
Class name: Honeywell_ScannerWith the buttons at the upper part of the screen you can call up the corresponding functions as describedbelow.This table gives an overview of the functions:
Name FunctionShow information View the code read by the hand scanner
Show hierarchy View the classification of the read codes from the current job in a tree view
Show aggregation View the already carried out aggregation within the current aggregationstep
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 163 / 274
6.9.4.1 Show Information
Press Show information in order to show the code read by the hand scanner.
Figure: Home > hand scanner > Show information (during production)
6.9.4.2 Show Hierarchy
Press Show hierarchy at the Hand scanner navigator screen and scan a product to show theclassification of the read codes of the current job in a tree view.
Figure: Home > hand scanner > Show hierarchy (during production)
You can call up any job name from the database by pressing enter order name and entering the ordername. You can also scan a data matrix code by hand scanner to get information about its hierarchy. PressClear to reset the display.
Legend of the verification statusThe verification status of the order is shown in the status box. The color of the text does not reflect the actualstatus.The color of the frame and the fill of the status box in front of each order number may vary:• Units with parents
The frame defines the verification status of the parent unit. The fill defines the verification status of theselected unit.
• Units without parentsFrame and fill define the verification status of the selected unit.
The following legend describes the different colors of the verification status:
Color DescriptionGreen Serial number is commissioned
164 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Color DescriptionWhite Valid serial number
White frame: Item without parent (rank 1) inaggregated order. Status is defined by inner color
Yellow Serial number not verified by the camera
Red Serial number derecognized by the hand scanner
Blue Only as frame color. A QA sample is withdrawn.
Inner triangle The target quantity defined in the order is exceeded.This is only possible when you use manual aggre-gation. Warnings are displayed.
The height of the fill in the status box indicates the filling of the case:
Filling DescriptionFrame without fill The case is empty.
Frame half filled The case is partly filled.
Frame completely filled The case is full.
6.9.4.3 Show Aggregation
Press the show aggregation in order to show the already carried out aggregation within the currentaggregation step.
Figure: Home > hand scanner > Show aggregation (during production)
Press reset to set back the display and then from this point in time, newly aggregated serial numbers aredisplayed.
6.9.4.4 Debug Console
The debug surface enables analysis of read-in codes. The debug console button is only visible if undersystem settings at the parameter ‘debugMode’ a checkmark is set.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 165 / 274
6.9.5 Wolke Printer Menu during ProductionThe Printer menu of the Wolke printer provides the following options:
Home > Wolke Printer (during production)
Class name: Wolke_M600Service keys:• Machine settings• Ink settings• In Process Control• Label display
6.9.5.1 Machine Settings
Here you get Information about the settings of the Wolke printer.
Figure: Home > Wolke Printer > Machine Settings (during production)
166 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
6.9.5.2 Ink Level Settings
This Menu displays the printer settings (Wolke Printer). Settings can be configured. This screen displays theink levels of the print heads. The ink level display can be set back to 100% with Reset Ink Levelswhen the cartridge is changed.
Figure: Home > Wolke Printer > Ink Level Settings (during production)
6.9.5.3 Cleaning Wolke-Cartridges
It is possible to clean the cartridges of the Wolke printer without clearance of machinery. Proceed asfollows:During production is running press Production > Suspend. Remove, clean and insert the cartridge(see: Wolke printer operating manual). After cleaning you can start production again.
6.9.5.4 Show in Process Control
During production the discharge mechanism of the Wolke printer can be tested at this menu.
Home > Wolke Printer > Show in Process Control (during production)
At this screen you have the following options:• Load IPC: Desired printout manipulation (e.g. print „B” rather than „8”) is possible.• Trigger IPC: With a folding box, the printout remains empty.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 167 / 274
6.9.5.5 Label Preview
The label of the selected printer format is displayed. Fields surrounded by green are variable, grey fields arefields not used.
Home > Wolke Printer > Show Label Preview (during production)
6.9.6 Domino Printer MenuThe domino printer menu while production is running looks as follows:
Home > Domino Printer (during production)
At this menu you have the following options:• Start SIM: Start printer simulation software.• Browse: Select path where the software for the APS printer simulation software can be found.• Refresh directory: Refreshes the displayed directory.• Send selected file: Send selected file to printer.• Send all files: Send all files to printer.• Get selected file: Send selected file from printer to IPC.• Get all files: Send all files from printer to IPC.• Reset ink level: Reset counter for the ink level after change of ink cartridge.
6.9.7 Camera Menu during ProductionThe camera menu during production shows the reading result of the last read item. Press Home > Cameramenu > batch records > show pictures. At this screen you can see the pictures of the SmartCamera, which have led to an error.
168 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Camera good reading:
Home > Camera menu > batch records > show pictures (during production) - good
Camera bad reading:
Home > Camera menu > batch records > show pictures (during production) - bad
If a reading error occurs, this is optically displayed at the Show error images screen by a red frame.The red frame marks the codes / numbers / characters which were detected as false. At the upper left of thered frame you see what type of error it is, e.g. OCV0, OCV1.
Error Message after consecutive errorIf the same error occurs consecutively (depending on system settings, consecutive error), anerror message will be displayed to confirm.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 169 / 274
6.9.8 PLCDuring production PLC menu provides the information as in the following screen:
Home > PLC (during production)
Class name: Siemens SPS IP / SPS PPI. Only the counters are displayed.
6.10 Communication with PCE Site ManagerPLM and PSM commonly write and use the same database. These data are permanently updated by bothsystems.
PLM and PSM use common DatabaseUpload of new aggregation to PCE Site Manager (PSM) happens automatically by storing datato the database and needs no manual action.
No reprocessing after upload to databaseWhen data is already sent to the ERP System by PSM (aggregation flagged), it is not possibleto reprocess.
It is possible to apply format settings to the PLM that were pre-configured in the PSM. For this refer to thePSM operating manual.
6.11 AlarmsIf an alarm occurs at the system or its components, it is shown on the status bar at the bottom of thescreen. For information about the alarms and further actions see the Alarm List delivered with the technicaldocumentation.
170 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
7 Quick ReferenceThis chapter contains step-by-step instructions for serialization and aggregation with PLM on a productionline.
7.1 Installation and Setup
7.1.1 Set up an OrderPrerequisites: Driver software has been previously installed
Feature Background: To set up an Order on a PLM system
1. Login2. Press Production and then Add/Edit order.
3. Press Add; Enter a name and select a line format; Press Save.
4. Press Details; Enter values for order (see chapter [Order Management } Page 118]); Press VerifyData; If verification was completed successfully, confirm with OK.
5. Pres 2 x Back; Press Start Production via order.
7.1.2 Set up a ProductPrerequisites:Driver software has been previously installed
Feature Background:To set up an order on a PLM system
1. Switch from overview to production mode
2. Switch from production mode to Add/edit product
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 171 / 274
3. Add/edit product menu:
4. Place cursor in Product line
5. Enter Product name and -description
172 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
6. Menu for newly added product
7. Add new product field for new product8. Select GTIN-product field9. Assign Rank 1
10. Define value for GTIN variable
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 173 / 274
11. Add further Product filed for new product12. Once again, select GTIN Product field13. Assign Rank 3
14. Define value for GTIN variable
Product setup is finished.
7.1.3 Installation of a New PLMPrerequisites: Driver software has been previously installed
Feature Background: To set up a new PLM and keep the previous one
7.1.3.1 Installing a New PLM and Keep the Previous One
1. Login as sysadmin to the PLM2. Use ‘log off’ ‘exit to OS’ to leave the PLM and access Windows3. Go to the folder ‘C:/PCE/Pilot/ ‘ rename the folder ‘Pilot’ to ‘Pilot_old’4. Create a new Folder named Pilot in the PCE folder
Problems that can occurWith step 4): no Windows Taskbar or Desktop as usual
Solution: plug in a keyboard and press ‘ctrl’ ‘alt’ ‘delete’ to start the Taskmanager
With step 3): Path not found
Solution: Right click on the PLM-icon on the Desktop to display the properties. There you can find the path.
174 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
7.2 Manual Operations
7.2.1 Handle Items at Power Failure or E-StopPrerequisites: Driver software has been previously installed
Feature Background: To handle items after a power failure or an emergency stop
After an emergency stop or power failure, all items within the XS2MV have to be picked up and checked1. Go to the menu Home > Hand scanner (global) > Show information
2. Scan the item and check the status “valid”3. Status valid = 0: Throw away/rework the item.Status valid = 1: Press “decommission” and check, if the status valid changes to 0. Throw away/rework theitem.
7.2.2 Reprint a Case or Pallet Label1 Go to Home > <Global Scanner> >Show hierarchy.
2 Scan case or pallet label or select label to be reprinted within the hierarchy tree.
3 Press Print Label. The printed serial number can be the same or a different serial number, depending onthe system setting 'RA01 Reprint new serial'.
4 Confirm with Yes.
5 Verify the label with the (global, case, or pallet, respectively) hand scanner.
7.2.3 Continue Suspended Order1. Press Production > Start Production via order
2. Press the suspended order (order color is orange)3. Press Next > Start Production
7.2.4 Suspend an Order1. Press Production > Suspend to suspend an order. The order data stays active, even if the system isswitched off. The order color gets orange within the order list.2. Press Continue to continue the order.
7.2.5 View Hierarchy1) Press Home > Hand scanner Global.
2) Press Show hierarchy
3) Scan label. Hierarchy is shown
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 175 / 274
7.2.6 Aggregate an Item to a closed Partial Case1. Press Home > Hand scanner Global > Show Hierarchy
2. Scan a valid and orphaned item3. Press Aggregate
4. Enter SSCC of the partial case or scan case label5. Confirm with OK
6. If content count is reached (case is complete), a label is printed automatically. OR If content count is notreached (case is incomplete) continue with Partial case or pallet aggregation to close theincomplete bundle.
7.2.7 Aggregate a case to a closed partial pallet1. Press Home > ‘Hand scanner Global’ > Show Hierarchy
2. Scan case3. Press Aggregate
4. Enter SSCC of the partial pallet or scan pallet label5. Confirm with OK
7.2.8 Aggregate pallet to Shipment1) A shipment is rank 52) Quantity of pallets for shipment has to be high enough to ensure each shipment has to be closedmanually. This means the content count (AI 37) must be higher than the possible number of pallets at theshipment to ensure a SSCC label is printed.
7.2.9 Aggregate Item to Case at MAS1. Select Home > ‘Hand scanner Global’ > Show aggregation.2. Select Case (Rank3) and Aggregate.3. Scan items.4. Select Aggregate.5. Select Close.6. Select Print new LabelThe screen looks as follows:7. Enter content size of new case and press Enter at the keyboard.8. A case label will be printed.9. Verify label with hand scanner.10. Close the case and apply the label to the case.
176 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
8 System Settings
8.1 Defining Database ConnectionSwitching between external and internal database is done by appropriate entries in the registry. To adapt thescripts to the client’s requirements, the PLM registry scripts must be adapted using an editor such asNotepad.A loss of the external database connection directly leads to a production stop.The registry scripts save the data connection data in the Windows registry.
Example for the Microsoft SQL in Windows Registry Editor Version 5.00[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\JavaSoft\Prefs\de\pharmacontrol\tnt]"db/Driver/Class/Name"="com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc./S/Q/L/Server/Driver""db/Connect/U/R/L"="jdbc:sqlserver:\\\\192.168.115.120:1433;/Database/Name=PCEPILOT_V1_7""db/Username"="sa""db/Password"="""line/Name"="local"
8.2 Switching between LinesIf you want to change a production to another line you can easily do that via the switch line function.Select System Settings > Switch Line (see chapter [The System Settings OverviewScreen } Page 28]). The 'Switch Line screen' appears.Select the desired line and press Switch line. The line is then selected. The currently selected line isshown at the 'Line ident' field at the upper right of the screen.
8.2.1 Changing global System SettingsIf you would like to change the global system settings, select ‘DEFAULT’ from the list, press Switch line.Then go to the system settings and change the values. After changing the values at the system settings goback to switch line and select the previous line.
8.3 Second Signature ConfigurationSecond Signature is a security feature which allows defining actions and/or messages that have to beconfirmed by a second user (four-eye principle). To use this feature some configuration settings have to beset up. A list of the second signature settings can be imported and exported. To set the second signaturefeature you need the following user rights:• maySeeButtonSysConfig• mayEditSysSettings• maySeeSecSigConfig
PreconditionsAt the user management groups have defined levels. Only users, who are group members and who havea defined password can participate in the second signature process.The second signature can be given only by a user which is registered at the PLM database and is notlocked.Additional rules for second signature privilege:• The level a user belongs to is also his authorization level• Valid group level values are 1….10. Level 10 is the highest level.• The group level of the signing user has to be higher than the group level of the user that is to be signed.• If a user belongs to more than one group, the authority of the higher group is valid.• Members of the highest group level (Level10) can sign each other.• Users not related to any group get level 0 and cannot participate in second signature.• Users related to more than one group get the highest level among the levels of the groups
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 177 / 274
8.3.1 Activating Second SignatureIn this chapter it is described how to activate and assign the ‘second signature’ feature.To activate the second signature feature, perform the following steps:
Step Description Explanation1 Press System Settings > Edit System
Settings-
2 Set a checkmark at both checkboxes of theparameter ‘SI01 Second signature’.
-
3 Press Save. To save the settings
To assign the second signature query for an action/message, perform the following steps:
Step Description Explanation1 Press System Settings > (Second
signature action configuration orSecond signature message configu-ration)
According to which you want to assign(message or action)
2 Press Import To load a second signature xml file (if notpreviously done)
3 Select the Second Signature xml file and pressopen
File will be loaded
4 Set the checks At the checkboxes of the messages/actionswhich need to be confirmed with a secondsignature
5 Press Save To save the settings
6 Restart the PCE Line Manager After restart changes are valid
8.3.2 Second Signature GroupThis parameter is used to facilitate the second signature function. If this parameter is activated all othergroup hierarchies in terms of second signature are unregarded and only users who join the “SI02 SecondSignature” group are allowed to confirm. All other users do not have confirmation rights.To activate the ‘SI02 second signature group’ feature, perform the following steps:
Step Description Explanation1 Press System Settings > Edit System
Settings-
2 Enter the parameters for: ‘AD01 Active Directoryserver name’; AD02 Active Directory domainname‘; AD03 Active Directory search path‘;AD02 Active Directory search filter‘.
This is a precondition to use the function. Theparameters are grayed out because these areglobal system settings. How to change thesettings see chapter [Changing global SystemSettings } Page 177].
3 Set a checkmark at both checkboxes of theparameter ‘SI02 Second signature group’.
-
4 Press Save. To save the settings
After activating the ‘second signature group’ function you can add users to the group to allocate secondsignature rights to them.
178 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
8.3.3 Message Configuration ScreenWithin this menu you can define the messages which need to be confirmed with a second signature. A listof the available alarm and warning numbers can be imported. The data can be imported and exported asan XML file.
Figure: System Settings > Second signature message configuration
8.3.4 Action Configuration ScreenWithin this menu you can define the actions which need to be confirmed with a second signature by settinga checkmark at its checkbox. A list of the available actions can be imported. The data can be imported andexported as an XML file.
Figure: System Settings > Second signature action configuration
8.3.5 Importing / Exporting the Second Signature XML FileThe second signature xml file contains all actions / messages for which the feature is available.
ImportTo import the second signature xml file press System Settings > (Second signature actionconfiguration or Second signature message configuration) > import > (Select theSecond Signature xml file) > open.
ExportTo export the second signature xml file press System Settings > (Second signature actionconfiguration or Second signature message configuration) > export.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 179 / 274
8.4 Importing ERP Data over XML ConfigurationThe functionality allows to import order/product data from an XML file. The import occurs on accessing theproduction start (Production > Start production via order). In case of a successful import the new orderappears in the order list.
NOTICENew order/product namesThe order/product with the given name should not already exist in the PLM database.
SettingsIn order to activate the "ERP over XML" functionality, the following system settings have to be configuredunder System Settings > Edit system settings:
• EX01 (ERP over XML)• PX01 (ERP over XML path)See chapter [System Parameters List } Page 31].
Importing Data1 Go to System Settings > ERP data over XML Configuration.
ð Within this menu you can define the paths, where the PCE Line Manager gets order and productdata of an XML document.
2 Define the AIs and the paths to their values in the XML.ð The syntax of the XML is XPATH.
3 Press Add and select a new path for the XML configuration and confirm.
System Settings > Importing ERP Data over XML Configuration
NOTICECritical AIsThe following table describes AIs that are critical for the import.
AI DescriptionR08 Order name. Is obligatory for order export.
R07 Product name. Is obligatory for product export.
R09 Line format. Can be used for order export. If defined,the order is assigned to this line format automaticallyon creation.
180 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Example for Order Export
XML File for Import<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<order number="T12105" lineformat="F000109605"><data><ai name="10" value="T12105"/><ai name="11" value="120208"/><ai name="17" value="191212"/></data></order>
8.5 E-mail NotificationThe email notification allows informing users about internal error messages via email.The email notification is implemented as a device class. Thus a device has to be created in order to use it.Create a device. Name the device “Email_Notification”. How to create a device see chapter [Creating aDevice } Page 36]. Select PCE_EMAIL_NOTIFICATION as Class name. Press OK.
System Settings > Create edit device/add device
Open The Email notification by clicking the following path:
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 181 / 274
System Setting > Edit Device Settings > Email_Notification
Figure: System Settings > Add Edit Device Settings > Email_Notification
At the tab enter the following Data:
Field Name Example DescriptionName: Email_Notification The device name is entered
Description: PCE Email Notification The name of the email subject line
DafaultSender-Address:
Emailnotification@(domain).com Sender Address
DafaultUser: Anonymous@(domain).com Email server address
MailHost: info.(domain).com Host Address
Password: ******* Password
BoxingRank: (O) Global Predefined
Press Parameters. Enter a destination email address where the email has to be sent to and enter thedesired error code which has to be sent to this address. Repeat this step for several email addresses. Presssave to save the email notification settings.
8.6 Edit Month Name ListThe month name list defines different notations of month names which can be used for different languagesor purposes.
Define month namesThe notations are defined in the month name list. Therefore the XML-file has to be edited. Add additionalmonth name lists by entering new monthlist entries (MNLxx) to the XML file. Existing lists can be adapted ordeleted. The following rules should be considered:• Month names can be any string of characters• Month names should not start with a decimal digit or a punctuation character or containing white space
characters• Each month names list has to define 12 or 13 month names separated by semicolon. A semicolon can
not be part of a month name.
Table: Examples of month name lists
Month namelist
Content Description Example
MNL01 JAN; FEB; MRZ; APR; MAI; JUN; JUL;AUG; SEP; OKT; NOV; DEZ
German, capitals, abbre-viated
2018 MRZ
MNL02 Jan.; Feb.; Mar.; Apr; May.; Jun.; Jul.;Aug.; Sep.; Oct.; Nov.; Dec.
English, capitals, abbre-viated, period
2018 Mar.
182 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Month namelist
Content Description Example
MNL03 Q1;Q1;Q1;Q2;Q2;Q2;Q3;Q3;Q3;Q4;Q4;Q4
German, quarters 2018 Q1
XML example:{{{
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="no"?>
<MonthList version="1.0">
<monthlists>
<monthlist id="MNL01">JAN;FEB;MRZ;APR;MAI;JUN;JUL;AUG;SEP;OKT;NOV;DEZ</monthlist>
<monthlist id="MNL02">Jan;Feb;Mar;Apr;May;Jun;Jul;Aug;Sep;Oct;Nov;Dec</monthlist>
<monthlist id="MNL03">Q1;Q1;Q1;Q2;Q2;Q2;Q3;Q3;Q3;Q4;Q4;Q4;</monthlist>
</monthlists>
</MonthList>
}}}
Import / Export month name listTo get to the dialog where you can import / export the month name list press System Settings > Editmonth name list.
The screen looks as follows:
System Settings > Edit month name list
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 183 / 274
Import the month name list by pressing Import and export it by pressing Export and select the list toimport or select the folder for export.
System Settings > Edit month name list > Import
To save the month name list press Save.
Use the month name list in the device formatMonth name lists can be used to display the month in a human readable character string instead of anumber (e.g. MRZ instead of 03). This has to be defined in the date field by using the specific month namelist identifier instead of 'MM'. Go to the device settings in the line format and replace 'MM' by the monthname list identifier 'MNLxx'. Here it is essential to set the identifier in single quotes, double quotes are notallowed:• Correct: 'MNL01'• Wrong: "MNL01"See the following screen:
Production > Add/Edit line format > Devices > (Smart Camera tab)
8.7 System InformationOn the System Information screen on the tab System Information you find the following system infor-mation:• Operating System• Network
184 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
• Database• Devices• Line Settings• Second Signature
8.7.1 Extracting System InformationTo get an overview of every installed software and device open the System Settings screen and select thetab System Information. The following screen appears:
System Settings > System information
• Click Clipboard to copy the information into the clipboard in order to insert it into an editor (e.g.notepad).
• Click Service Info to collect all relevant data such as logs for error analysis, if an error occurs.
• Press Save to save the system information into the ‘system_info.log’ file in the '<your installation>/PCE/Pilot/log> path (or in the 'PDF Templates' path defined in the system settings, if applicable).
See also2 The System Settings Overview Screen } Page 28
8.7.2 System LoggingProgram reports-log files are displayed in this menu for informational purposes and for error searches. Thecontent is saved in the 'plm.log' file in the '<yourinstallation>:/PCE/Pilot/log' path (or in the 'PDF Templates'path defined in the system settings, if applicable).
System settings > System information > System logging tab
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 185 / 274
Enable Debugging: This button switches the PLM temporarily to the debug mode. When restarting the PLM,it will be switched to normal mode.
8.8 Remove / Save Error ImagesAt this screen you save error images or remove error images that are no longer needed. Press SystemSettings - Remove save error images to get to this dialog. Select an image and save it with theSaveor remove it with Delete.
System Settings > Remove save error images
186 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
9 Statistics
9.1 Log File ManagementA log file mechanism is closely linked to the user rights system. The PLM provides a fully integrated systemwide log file function, which itself can be accessed via a login mechanism.
Log File Management
The PLM log file mechanism executes an automatic login/logout protocol.• All actions are registered and recorded automatically• All actions are marked with a time stamp• Also changes in the allocation of user rights are registered in the log file and are therefore traceableAll information to be recorded in the present log file is sorted according to date in the main window. The logfile data is archived on a database. Data backup and time span of the storage is determined customized.Print creates a PDF-report of all logged data in the database. This report is digitally signed and can bearchived (customized) or printed directly.
All actions are marked with a time stampYou can view the time stamps at the log file.
Show advancedTo show the Filter screen press Show advanced. The following screen appears:
Log File Management > show advanced
Hide advanced leads back to the log file screen without view of the filter screen.
To look for special messages, you can filter the list:
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 187 / 274
Press Activate.
Choose ‘Filtered level’ and ‘Filtered User’. Multiple choices are possible.Insert filtered period, if wished.Press Search.
If you want to look for a special word, you can enter it into the field ’Filter:’ and the search startsimmediately. With the Print key, a file is generated in the selected format. The latter is saved in the “C:/PCE/Pilot/pdf” path (or in the “PDF Templates” path defined in the system settings, if applicable).
Log File Management > show advanced > Print
9.2 View StatisticsThe PLM is provided with some statistic functions. Press statistics to get the statistics menu, see below:
From here you have the following options:
Name FunctionCounters Counter statistics for good/bad units
Print quality Counter statistics for good/bad units
DB Statistics Counter statistics for checked and decommission products accordingto the various boxing ranks
History Allows to track every event that changes the state of a serial numberduring the production. Creation of a gapless history of the completeproduction.
Statistics ofGarvensWeigher
Counter statistics for good/bad units of Garvens checkweigher
188 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
9.2.1 Counters
Figure: Statistics > Counters
Within this screen you can see the counters for the PLC and for the camera for each defined control window.PLC:• Products• RejectCamera:• OCV error• Data matrix errorThe columns on the right side show trend parameters for the production.
9.2.2 Print Quality
Figure: Statistics > Print quality
In this menu the statistics evaluation of the print quality verified by the camera can be seen.The following codes can be evaluated by the camera:• DM-Code according to ISO 15415-Standard (Quality A / B / C / D / F)• Barcode 128 according to ISO 15416-Standard (Quality A / B / C / D / F)There are several single parameters which in sum lead to the grade of the print quality. The columns on theright side show the trends for individual parameters.Verification activation of print quality via the camera is carried out in the camera menu as described in theoperating manual „Optical Character Reading“.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 189 / 274
9.2.3 Show Error Images
Figure: Statistics > Show error images
Within this menu you can see the pictures of the Smart Camera, which have led to an error evaluation.
9.2.4 Database Statistics
Figure: Statistics > DB Statistics
Within this menu you can see the number of checked and decommissioned products according to thevarious ranks (in serialization and aggregation only).
9.2.5 Serial Number TraceabilityTo track the changes of status of serial numbers, the system setting parameter HI01 (Order Unit History)has to be checked (System settings > Edit system settings > HI01).
The PLM contains two different views to give the user the opportunity to see the collected traceability infor-mation:
• Single Serial Number View: displays only the information of a single serial number
• Order View: displays the whole order history with additional filter functionality
190 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
9.2.5.1 Single Serial Number View
In the INFORMATION view of the global hand scanner the button History opens access to the single serialnumber history view.
In the HIERARCHY view on the advanced button menu there is also a button History. With this button it isalso possible to open the history view of the selected item.
The single serial number history view shows only the events of the selected serial number. The event namesare representations for the database keys and will differ for each language. There is no filter functionality.With the Button “Refresh” the view can be refreshed.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 191 / 274
9.2.5.2 Order View
The production Serial number traceabilty view is located in the statistics menu (Statistics > History).It shows the complete history of an order.
The order history shows the events for all serial numbers. With the advanced filter it is possible to filterspecific events, users or a time period. There is also a refresh button to update the view.
9.2.5.3 Quality Sample
With the serial number traceability there is also the possibility to tag a serial number as a quality sample.For a user to be able to tag or untag a serial number as a quality sample the user rights “mayTagUni-tAsQASample” and "mayUntagUnitAsQASample” are required. To tag a serial number as quality sample theuser has to open the HIERARCHY view of the hand scanner. In the right bottom corner there is the buttonShow Advanced Opts. To open the button menu on the right. There is the button to tag or untag a serialnumber as a quality sample.
192 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
10 Master Slave FeatureThe feature allows to perform several aggregation steps independently within a line. When using thisfeature, one PLM works as master (recommended is the XMV, Rank1) and all other PLMs work as slaves.
Benefits• The master is the only station within a line where the order can be created, edited, started and finished.• If a fatal error occurs, only one rank will be deactivated, production can continue at the other stations.• If a fatal error occurs, only the affected machine part has to be cleared of products, not the whole line.• During production only the needed stations have to be available (other stations can be maintained).
Conditions• If master/slave mode is used in a line there has to be one master and all other stations have to be
slaves.• Slaves are only allowed to suspend and continue orders if they were started previously by the master.
Creating, starting, finishing, and deleting orders is not possible from there.• When an order is finished at the master, the order is also finished at all slaves.• Devices are specific for each PLM. Product data, user management, and order data are valid for the
entire line.• Slaves and master always use the same database to avoid redundant data storage.
10.1 Introduction and ScopeWhy Do We Need The Master-Slave Operating Mode?A production line with only one PLM controlling the whole line has a big efficiency issue. Each time one partof the line runs into an error or its production is interrupted due to a manual intervention the whole line willbe stopped.The production can only be continued after all issues are resolved and the line is cleaned-up.The master-slave operating mode addresses this issue.
ApproachSplitting up a production line into separate runnable parts which are coordinated by one part - the master -allows a much more flexible work flow.After a production start each part should be runnable independently from the other parts. Problems on onepart should not necessarily imply that the whole line must be stopped.Typically a line will be split up into separate parts following the given mechanical structure. An aggregationline with a Datamatrix Station, a Shipping Case Station, and a Palletizer Station can be split up into amaster and two slaves.Structural basis for a separate part is a separate controllable unit.• It must contain a PC on which a separate PLM can be run.• It must support two network connections, one line internal, one to the external database server.• Automatically running parts should have a separate PLC controlling the specific machine and communi-
cating on signal basis with the part before and the part after.The master is the part on which a PLM is running in the standard mode. slaves are parts on which PLMruns in a reduced mode which does not support order management. Slaves are integrated into the mastersby registering them as devices in the masters device management. Each part, master and slave connecttheir devices like PLCs, Cameras, Printers, etc. Each part defines own line formats.
Order CreationOrder Management is only done on the master.Line Formats of slaves are imported into the master via the masters line format.The slave line format import follows the same scheme as the label import of a printer into the line format.This is due to the device character of a slave from the master’s point of view.Defining an order is only possible in the master.By using the masters line format, which already contains all slave line formats, a combination of all fieldsis created in the order.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 193 / 274
Production start via order is only possible from the master PLM. Depending on the configuration the slavesproductions will automatically be started with the masters or can join the production separately.An interruption of one part does not hinder other parts to stay in running mode. Suspension and contin-uation of a production run can be processed separately for each part.Finishing a production can only be done on the master PLM. Finishing the production on master, forces astop on all slaves.
10.2 PLM Configuration
10.2.1 Database SetupThe master and each slave must be defined as separate line in a common database (tbl_lines) on adatabase server. The database connection has to be set for each line as a registry entry. The secondnetwork card of the IPC should be used for this external net. An automatic IP address can be used.Example registry database connection entry:MasterWindows Registry Editor Version 5.00
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\JavaSoft\Prefs\de\pharmacontrol\tnt]"db/Driver/Class/Name"="com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc./S/Q/L/Server/Driver""db/Connect/U/R/L"="jdbc:sqlserver:\\\\172.25.73.70:1433;/Database/Name=PLM411""db/Username"="sa""db/Password"="Ankara2000""line/Name"="Master"
Slave 1 (the same as master but different line name)"line/Name"="SCS-Slave"
Slave 2 (the same as master but different line name)"line/Name"="MAS-Slave"
Slaves never have an own database. They are always connected to the same database as the master.
Local CacheExample registry database connection additional entry for Local Cache (This part is identical for all Masterand Slave lines):"local/Connect/U/R/L"="jdbc:sqlserver:\\\\192.168.100.200:1433;/Database/Name=PCE_Cache"
"local/Driver/Class/Name"="com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerDriver""local/Username"="pceadmin""local/Password"="pce123ZW2014""cache/Service/Credentials"="sa:Ankara2000"
Local Cache - Line SettingsThe Local Caching option must be enabled in the Line Settings:The parameter 'LC01' has to be enabled for all involved master and slaves.It is a global parameter which can be accessed via switch line to line DEFAULT.System Settings > Edit System Settings and scroll until 'LC01'.
Local Cache - Setup VerificationThe PLM system_info.log lists the databases:Master------------ Database (global)
Class: com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerDriverURL: jdbc:sqlserver://172.25.73.70:1433;DatabaseName=PLM411User: saPassword: ****
194 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
------------ Database (cache)
cache enabled: trueDatabase: Local Cache Mode Class: com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerDriverURL: jdbc:sqlserver://127.0.0.1:1433;DatabaseName=PCE_CacheUser: pceadminPassword: ****
SCS Slave------------ Database (global)
Class: com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerDriverURL: jdbc:sqlserver://172.25.73.70:1433;DatabaseName=PLM411User: saPassword: ****
------------ Database (cache)
cache enabled: false Database: Local Cache Mode Class:com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerDriverURL: jdbc:sqlserver://192.168.100.200:1433;DatabaseName=PCE_CacheUser: pceadminPassword: ****
MAS Slave------------ Database (global)
Class: com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerDriverURL: jdbc:sqlserver://172.25.73.70:1433;DatabaseName=PLM_4_10_TestUser: saPassword: ****
------------ Database (cache)
cache enabled: false Database: Local Cache Mode Class:com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerDriverURL: jdbc:sqlserver://192.168.100.200:1433;DatabaseName=PCE_CacheUser: pceadminPassword: ****
10.2.2 Internal ConnectionThe master and slaves are connected internally via TCP/IP.• The internal network cards with IPs 192.168.10x.20x have to be used for this connection.• TcpAckFrequency should be activated in the registry for this network.• The devices of each line are connected through the same network. The internal communication between
master and slaves is used for state messages and for pushing the start event from the master to theslaves. A slave can be started without the master. In cases an unfinished order is available, it can becontinued by the slave.
10.2.3 Line SetupDatabase Line Definitions for SlavesThe lines must be set up separately, i.e. the devices are configured into the separate line PLMs and the lineshave their own line formats with their device formats.
Launching SlavesThe master line can be started with the standard launcher.The slaves have to be set up in the database tbl_lines. The column 'i16_type' in the database schema 2.2allows to define the slave lines:-1 = Global settings line ('DEFAULT')0 = Master line/ default single line1 = Slave line
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 195 / 274
10.2.4 Device Creation for PLM_SLAVEThe slaves have to be configured on the master under System Settings > Create/Edit Device,class 'PLM_SLAVE'.
Device Settings for PLM_SLAVEIn the System Settings > Edit Device Settings dialog the IP address and the line name of theslave have to be filled in.
Example for SCS-Slave Configuration:IP address: 192.168.102.202 Explanation: internal network card IP (IPC) of the specific station (SCS, MASetc.)lineName: SCS-Slave
The parameters 'automaticMode' and 'autoStartOrder' allow configuring the start behavior of the slave.On a production start or continuation of master all devices with activated 'automaticMode' must be ON andreachable via the internal network 192.168.10x.2xx. This is also true for Slave PLMs registered in master.On a production start or continuation of master to all devices with activated 'autoStartOrder' a command willbe send to also start or continue their production.
The master’s reaction to different Slave states can be found in the following table:
Start / Continue Master productionSlave ON, Slaveprod. ON
Slave ON, Slaveprod. OFF
Slave OFF orunreachable
automaticMode ONautoStartOrder ON
no problem,start / continuepossible
error,start / continueimpossible
error,start / continueimpossible
automaticMode ONautoStartOrder OFF
no problem,start / continuepossible
no problem,start / continuepossible
error,start / continueimpossible
automaticMode OFFautoStartOrder ON
no problem,start / continuepossible
warning,start / continuepossible
warning,start / continuepossible
not for LC01 ON
automaticMode OFFautoStartOrder OFF
no problem,start / continuepossible
no problem,start / continuepossible
warning,start / continuepossible
not for LC01 ON
'automaticMode OFF' is not possible in Local Cache configuration. Slaves have to be available onproduction start and continuation.
NOTICEModule PCE_LICP only onceThe module PCE_LICP can be added only once from the list of devices on master and onslave lines, independently.
196 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
10.2.5 Slave Visualization in MasterSlaves are visualized in the Master as if they were devices.
10.2.6 State InformationThe master visualizes the state of the slaves on the home screen in the device bar of the slave.Possible states are:SlaveConnectionEvent:• ONLINE• OFFLINE• EXCEPTIONStateType:• STARTED• SUSPENDEDThe slave indicates a connection to a master by an icon in the status bar.
Symbol Meaning DescriptionSlave offline Slave is switched off or slave is
physically not connected to themaster.
Slave connected to master Slave is not connected to themaster and ready for production.
The color of the Slave online / offline status symbol depends on the status bar. The color does not indicateany online / offline information.In case of LC01 ON (Local caching mode) the Icon will be overlaid with the Local Cache icon.
10.2.7 Line Formats and OrdersThe master line format includes the slave line format in the sense of a device format.LF-Master• LF Slave 1• LF Slave 2• Device Format SMC 1• Device Format Wolke 1• ...
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 197 / 274
The Slave Line formats are defined on the slave lines and include all device formats configured on the slavelines.All parameters included in a line format whether they are from the slaves line format or from the masters arecombined into an order. AIs are defined globally. This ensures that the same AIs are available throughout allmaster and slave lines.Orders are exclusively available in the master line. Order processing is hidden in slave lines.
10.2.8 Device FrameSlaves can be controlled from the master screen by remote connection. Go to theHome screen and clickthe corresponding device bar.The slave screen will be shown inside the main frame:
Home > (click corresponding device bar)
10.2.9 Log File, Audit TrailLog file and audit trail are written per line.
10.3 PSMThe PSM can differ between master and slave lines (database schema 2.2).
198 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
11 Backup and Restore SettingsFor information on this topic, see the Service Manual "Backup & Restore".
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 199 / 274
12 PLM direct
12.1 Starting PLM directTo use PLM direct, at least one additional device has to be configured. Without the additional device, youwork with the standard PCE Line Manager software. See chapter [Creating a PLM directdevice } Page 200].
12.2 Creating a PLM direct device1. At the sidebar click System Settings.
2. Click Create/edit device.
3. Click Add.
200 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
4. In the select list Class name: chose the entry 'PCE_DIRECT_XML'.
5. Click OK.
6. Click System Settings at the sidebar.
7. Click Edit device settings.
8. Select the device tab direct.
9. Select the export and import path.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 201 / 274
The path builds the interface to initiate data import respectively export between the PLM direct softwareand your ERP system. Within the export path the XML export data is stored. Within the import path theXML import data is stored. Both paths can be a network drive or any local drive. Optionally paths canalso contain information about the FTP transfer for automatic import or export of the XML.The import files contain your order data as XML file. Each XML file includes at least one order that givesall necessary information like the rank or coding scenario which has to be fulfilled. You deliver the orderrequirements. According to the requirements the line formats have to contain the appropriate number offields. If a line format contains more fields than given through the order XML file, the fields have to beadapted manually before the production starts.
10. Optionally: If you want to use line format specific import/export paths, use the option 'needDevice-Format'.The default settings contain no line specific allocation.
11. To receive a message concerning the import status of XML files, create all line formats before theproduction starts.The status appears in the particular log-file as well as in the status display.
12. Restart PLM direct after each new device setting or system settings’ changes.
NOTICEFor proper function it is mandatory that the order import/export path is already created.
NOTICEIf certain information is missing, when starting an order, you have to add those infor-mation into the XML and re-import the file. Optionally you can add missing informationalso within PLM direct.
NOTICEFiles can only be imported once. If a file import fails, the file remains, but is ignored aslong as it is not renamed.
ExampleYou can use an example XML for the import of serial numbers. See chapter [Example XML forimport } Page 204].
12.3 Installation Guide PLM Direct Arvato ConnectorInstalling PLM Arvato Connector1 Start PLM.
2 Open System Settings > Create / Edit Device > Add.
3 Choose a module name and select as class name: PCE_DIRECT_ARVATO. Only one instance per PLMis available.
4 Open System Settings > Edit Device Settings.
202 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
5 Select the Arvato module:ð
System Settings > Edit Device Settings
6 Enter ip: (IP address or DNS name of the Arvato SFTP server) default: none port: (IP port of the Arvato SFTP server) default: 22 ftpUser: (SFTP user name of the Arvato SFTP server) default: none ftpPassword: (SFTP user password of the Arvato SFTP server) default: none ftpRemoteInPath: (incoming path inside the SFTP server) default: none ftpRemoteOutPath: (outgoing path inside the SFTP server) default: none useCompression: (SFTP server supports transfer compression) default: on sendingComPartnerId: (Arvato system communication ID) default: none receivingComPartnerId: (PLM client communication ID) default: none acceptUnknownLineformat: (PLM accept orders with unknown/missing lineformat) default: true
Testing the Arvato SFTP connection− Download an SFTP Client tool, for example WinSCP from https://winscp.net/eng/index.php. Use the
same connection data and check the user credentials and the existence of ftpRemoteIn + OutPath.
ð
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 203 / 274
12.4 Example XML for importSerial range import<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<pce:PCEDocument xmlns:pce="urn:pharmacontrol:xsd:export"xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"xsi:schemaLocation="urn:pharmacontrol:xsd:export PCEdirect-import.xsd "><PCEHeader><!-- Internal file descriptor --><docId>docId</docId><docTime>2001-12-31T12:00:00</docTime><docTimeZoneOffset>+01:00</docTimeZoneOffset></PCEHeader><PCEBody><EventList><!-- Serial range import event --><SerialRangeImportEvent><eventTime>2001-12-31T12:00:00</eventTime><eventTimeZoneOffset>+01:00</eventTimeZoneOffset><packLevel>1</packLevel><serialRange><serialFrom>300000000000</serialFrom><serialTo>300000060000</serialTo></serialRange><prodCodeType>R18</prodCodeType><prodCode>00000000000000</prodCode></SerialRangeImportEvent></EventList></PCEBody></pce:PCEDocument>
Serial list import including aggregationThe resulting XML file contains the list of "<AggregationEvent>" structures in the "<EventList>" section. Eachaggregation event contains the parent serial number, its rank, date of event, product code, and the list ofaggregated child serial numbers.<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<pce:PCEDocument xsi:schemaLocation="urn:pharmacontrol:xsd:export PCEdirect-import.xsd"xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"xmlns:pce="urn:pharmacontrol:xsd:export"><PCEHeader><!-- Internal file descriptor --><docId>docId</docId><docTime>2001-12-31T12:00:00</docTime><docTimeZoneOffset>+01:00</docTimeZoneOffset></PCEHeader><PCEBody><MasterData><orderId>TestOrderAggregation</orderId><lineId>plmdirect</lineId><configurationId>PLMDirect</configurationId></MasterData><OrderDataList><OrderData><packLevel>0</packLevel><appId>17</appId><appValue>2018-01-01</appValue></OrderData><OrderData><packLevel>0</packLevel><appId>10</appId><appValue>23489</appValue></OrderData><OrderData><packLevel>1</packLevel><appId>01</appId><appValue>99999988888875</appValue></OrderData>
204 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
<OrderData><packLevel>1</packLevel><appId>R01</appId><appValue>PCLIST</appValue></OrderData><OrderData><packLevel>1</packLevel><appId>R03</appId><appValue>16</appValue></OrderData><OrderData><packLevel>3</packLevel><appId>01</appId><appValue>12398726252533</appValue></OrderData><OrderData><packLevel>3</packLevel><appId>R01</appId><appValue>PCLIST</appValue></OrderData><OrderData><packLevel>3</packLevel><appId>R03</appId><appValue>16</appValue></OrderData><OrderData><packLevel>4</packLevel><appId>01</appId><appValue>12398726252526</appValue></OrderData><OrderData><packLevel>4</packLevel><appId>R01</appId><appValue>PCLIST</appValue></OrderData><OrderData><packLevel>4</packLevel><appId>R03</appId><appValue>16</appValue></OrderData></OrderDataList><EventList><SerialListImportEvent><eventTime>2001-12-31T12:00:00</eventTime><eventTimeZoneOffset>+01:00</eventTimeZoneOffset><packLevel>1</packLevel><prodCodeType>01</prodCodeType><prodCode>99999988888875</prodCode><serialList><serialNumber>SNH3N4HMYL14T8LI</serialNumber><serialNumber>VGC8RW1BCMG8EH9L</serialNumber><serialNumber>Z2RHMGVRP4S8TWAL</serialNumber><serialNumber>BHFZW4A785X8MP4L</serialNumber><serialNumber>C45GMGS8HECETP2L</serialNumber><serialNumber>SAH04EBMKADXM8LL</serialNumber></serialList></SerialListImportEvent><SerialListImportEvent><eventTime>2001-12-31T12:00:00</eventTime><eventTimeZoneOffset>+01:00</eventTimeZoneOffset><packLevel>3</packLevel><prodCodeType>01</prodCodeType><prodCode>12398726252533</prodCode><serialList><serialNumber>SNH3N4HMYL14T8LL</serialNumber><serialNumber>VGC8RW1BCMG8EH9L</serialNumber></serialList></SerialListImportEvent><SerialListImportEvent><eventTime>2001-12-31T12:00:00</eventTime><eventTimeZoneOffset>+01:00</eventTimeZoneOffset><packLevel>4</packLevel>
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 205 / 274
<prodCodeType>01</prodCodeType><prodCode>12398726252526</prodCode><serialList><serialNumber>SNH3N4HMYL14T8LL</serialNumber></serialList></SerialListImportEvent></EventList></PCEBody></pce:PCEDocument>
206 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
13 Appendix
13.1 User Rights TableThis table lists the default User groups. For each group, a User has been pre-defined. The pre-defined Usernames are written in lower case. Further User groups for PSM can be seen within PLM, but do not influencePLM usage. These groups are described within the PSM manual.Default password for all default Users is '000'.Furthermore, all User rights are listed. The level only impacts the Second Signature function.
User Right PLM/PSM Description Level 3"adminis-trator"
Level 2"engineer"
Level 2"Supervisor" /"mechanic"
Level 1"operator"
accessPSA PLM User may login at PSM no no no no
Camera A PLM Camera menu: User maycreate, delete and renameproducts
yes yes yes no
Camera B PLM Camera menu: User maydelete and rename fonts
yes yes yes no
Camera C PLM Camera menu: User maystart/stop the lot protocol
yes yes yes no
Camera D PLM Camera menu: User mayset the reference code
yes yes no no
Camera E PLM Camera menu: User maychange the product
yes yes yes no
Camera F PLM Camera menu: User mayaccess the productmanagement
yes yes yes no
Camera G PLM Camera menu: User maychange fonts
yes yes yes no
Camera H PLM Camera menu: User mayaccess the service level
yes yes no no
Camera I PLM Camera menu: User mayswitch on/off the camera
yes yes no no
Camera J PLM Camera menu: User mayaccess the write protection/approval
yes yes no no
Camera K PLM Camera menu: User mayaccess the camera menu
yes yes yes no
isSupervisor PSM, PLM User gets all User rights -Service mode
no no no no
mayAddAIs PSM User may add new appli-cation identifiers
no no no no
mayAddEx-ternalUnit(PLM)
User can add external unitto an existing order
no no no no
mayAd-dGroups
PSM User may add groups no no no no
mayAd-dGTIN-Numbers
PSM User may register new GTINNumbers in PSM
no no no no
mayAd-dLineformat
PSM User may add lineformat no no no no
mayAd-dLines
PSM User may add new lines no no no no
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 207 / 274
User Right PLM/PSM Description Level 3"adminis-trator"
Level 2"engineer"
Level 2"Supervisor" /"mechanic"
Level 1"operator"
mayAddLi-neSettings
PSM User may add linesettings no no no no
mayAd-dOrderData
PSM Button <Add OrderData>visible: User may addorderdata manually
no no no no
mayAd-dOrders
PSM User may create new ordersin PSM
no no no no
mayAd-dPPN-Numbers
PSM User may add PPNnumbers in PSM
no no no no
mayAd-dProdCodeNumbers
PSM User may register newProdCode Numbers in PSM
no no no no
mayAd-dProducts
PSM User may add new products no no no no
mayAddSSC-CNumbers
PSM User may register newSSCC Numbers in PSM
no no no no
mayAd-dUsers
PSM, PLM User may add Users yes no no no
mayAggOv-erload
PLM User may overload aggre-gation units
no no no no
mayAssign-Lineformat
PSM User may add lineformat toOrder
no no no no
mayBookUnits
PLM User may commission anddecommission units
no no no no
mayChange-Activate-DisplayProductGtin-Setting
PSM User may change the"activate DisplayProductGTIN_Link" settingin PSM.
no no no no
mayChange-ActiveDirectory-Settings
PSM User may change ActiveDirectory Settings
no no no no
mayChangeEmailNotification-Settings
PSM User may change email -Notification Settings
no no no no
mayChangePassword
PLM User can change ownpassword. The button islocated in the menu “Login”
yes yes yes yes
mayChangeUsers
PSM, PLM User may change Usersettings
yes no no no
mayCloseAg-gUnitRank2
PLM Close aggregation unit onrank 2
no no no no
mayCloseAg-gUnitRank3
PLM Close aggregation unit onrank 3
no no no no
mayCloseAg-gUnitRank4
PLM Close aggregation unit onrank 4
no no no no
mayCloseAg-gUnitRank5
PLM Close aggregation unit onrank 5
no no no no
208 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
User Right PLM/PSM Description Level 3"adminis-trator"
Level 2"engineer"
Level 2"Supervisor" /"mechanic"
Level 1"operator"
mayCloseAg-gUnitRank6
PLM Close aggregation unit onrank 6
no no no no
mayCloseAg-gUnitRank7
PLM Close aggregation unit onrank 7
no no no no
mayCloseAg-gUnitRank8
PLM Close aggregation unit onrank 8
no no no no
mayCreateS-NRanges
PSM User may create ranges forserial numbers
no no no no
mayDeacti-vateAIs
PSM User may activate/deactivate applicationidentifiers
no no no no
mayDeag-gUnits
PLM User may deaggregatepackaging units
no no no no
mayDeleteAg-gUnitRank2
PLM User may delete the unitfrom aggregation cache orclear the cache on rank 2
no no no no
mayDeleteAg-gUnitRank3
PLM User may delete the unitfrom aggregation cache orclear the cache on rank 3
no no no no
mayDeleteAg-gUnitRank4
PLM User may delete the unitfrom aggregation cache orclear the cache on rank 4
no no no no
mayDeleteAg-gUnitRank5
PLM User may delete the unitfrom aggregation cache orclear the cache on rank 5
no no no no
mayDeleteAg-gUnitRank6
PLM User may delete the unitfrom aggregation cache orclear the cache on rank 6
no no no no
mayDeleteAg-gUnitRank7
PLM User may delete the unitfrom aggregation cache orclear the cache on rank 7
no no no no
mayDeleteAg-gUnitRank8
PLM User may delete the unitfrom aggregation cache orclear the cache on rank 8
no no no no
mayDelete-Groups
PSM User may delete groups no no no no
mayDelete-Lineformat
PSM User may delete line format no no no no
mayDeleteLines
PSM User may delete lines no no no no
mayDelete-LineSettings
PSM User may delete linesettings
no no no no
mayDelete-Orders
PSM, PLM User may delete workorders
no no no no
mayDeleteProducts
PSM User may delete products no no no no
mayDele-teUsers
PSM, PLM User may delete Users yes no no no
mayDe-stroyUnits
PLM User may destroy Aggre-gation of Units.
no no no no
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 209 / 274
User Right PLM/PSM Description Level 3"adminis-trator"
Level 2"engineer"
Level 2"Supervisor" /"mechanic"
Level 1"operator"
mayEditAIs PSM User may edit new appli-cation identifiers and definedependencies between AIs
no no no no
mayEditAp-pIdTable
PLM Button <AI Management>visible: User may edit GS1Application Identifier list
no no no no
mayEditAp-pIdType
PLM Button <AI Management>visible: User may edit GS1Application Identifier type
no no no no
mayEditDe-viceSettings
PLM Button <Edit DeviceSettings> visible: User mayedit devices settings
yes yes no no
mayEditDe-viceTable
PLM Button <Create/Edit Device>visible: User may create/editdevices
yes yes no no
mayEdit-Groups
PSM User may edit groups no no no no
mayEdit-GTIN-Numbers
PSM User may edit GTINNumbers in PSM
no no no no
mayEditLine-format
PLM Button <Create/Edit LineFormat> visible: User maycreate and edit line formats
yes yes yes no
mayEd-itLines
PSM User may edit log settings no no no no
mayEditLine-Settings
PSM User may edit line settings no no no no
mayEditLF-Product
PLM User may change theproduct on the edit lineformat screen.
no no no no
mayEdit-LogSettings
PSM User may change PSMmodule settings
no no no no
mayEdit-Module-Settings
PSM User may change PSMmodule settings
no no no no
mayEdit-Number-Ranges
PSM User may edit serial numberranges(The setting is currently notused and will be removedin the future)
no no no no
mayEdi-tOrder
PSM, PLM Button <Create/edit Order>visible: User may createand edit orders
yes yes yes yes
mayEd-itPPN-Numbers
PSM User may edit PPNnumbers
no no no no
mayEdit-ProdCode-Numbers
PSM User may edit existingProdCode Numbers in PSM
no no no no
mayEdit-Products
PSM, PLM Button <Add/Edit Product>visible: User may createand edit products
yes yes no no
210 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
User Right PLM/PSM Description Level 3"adminis-trator"
Level 2"engineer"
Level 2"Supervisor" /"mechanic"
Level 1"operator"
mayEdit-SNRanges
PSM User may edit serial numberranges
no no no no
mayEditSSC-CNumbers
PSM User may edit existing SSCCNumbers in PSM
no no no no
mayEditSys-Globals
PSM, PLM User may edit globalsystem settings
no no no no
mayEditSys-Settings
PLM Button <Edit SystemSettings> visible: User mayedit system settings
yes yes no no
mayExitToOS
PLM User may shut down PLMnode:35716149871002 .System returns to Windowsdesktop.
yes yes no no
mayExpor-tAuditTrailA-sExcel
PSM User may export audit trailas Excel file
no no no no
mayExpor-tAudit-TrailAsPDF
PSM User may export audit trailas PDF file
no no no no
mayExpor-tOrders
PSM User may export Orders toERP System
no no no no
mayImport-Serial-Numbers
PSM User may import serialnumbers
no no no no
mayLogin PLM User may login to PLM yes yes yes yes
mayOpen-DeviceFrame
PLM Button <Home> visible:User may open device GUI
yes yes yes yes
mayOrderSN PLM User may order serialnumbers(The setting is currently notused and will be removedin the future)
no no no no
mayPrintAu-ditTrail
PSM User may export audit trailvia Printer
no no no no
mayPrint-OrderResult
PLM Button <Order Result -Create Report> visible: Usermay see and print the orderreports
yes yes yes yes
mayReset-Logfile
PLM User can delete log file no no no no
mayRese-tOrder
PLM, PSM Button <Reset Order>visible: User may resetstatus of orders
no no no no
mayReset-SendStatus
PLM, PSM User may reset "sent" statusof unit.
no no no no
mayRestartOS
PLM Button <System reboot> isvisible on Logout panel ofPLM. User may restart PLM
yes yes no no
mayRe-workOrders
PLM User can create the ordersfor rework
no no no no
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 211 / 274
User Right PLM/PSM Description Level 3"adminis-trator"
Level 2"engineer"
Level 2"Supervisor" /"mechanic"
Level 1"operator"
mayRunTest-Production
PSM User may access TestProduction Generator inPSM
no no no no
maySeeAd-dition-alOptions
PLM User may see handheldscanner additional optionsscreen.(The setting is currently notused and will be removedin the future.)
no no no no
maySeeAg-gCloseExist
PLM User may use JPOScommandsCLOSE_EXIST_RANK_X ofthe global scanner
no no no no
maySeeAggHir
PLM User may see hand scannerhierarchy screen
no no no no
maySeeAggInfo
PLM User may see hand scannerinformation screen
no no no no
maySeeAggList
PLM User may see hand scanneraggregation screen
no no no no
maySeeAg-gOpenExist
PLM User may use JPOScommandsOPEN_EXIST_RANK_X ofthe global scanner
no no no no
maySeeAl-lUsers
PLM User may see all registeredUsers
yes no no no
maySeeBut-tonBackup
PLM Button <Backup> is visible:User may backup cameraformats and log file.
yes yes no no
maySeeBut-tonGroups
PLM Button <Groups> is visible:User may enter the Usergroups menu, to create/edit/delete User groups
yes no no no
maySeeBut-tonLogfile
PLM Button <Logfile> is visible:User may see and print theLogfile
yes yes yes yes
maySeeBut-ton-MoveSerialNumbers
PLM Button <Move SerialNumbers> is visible: Usermay move serial numbers
no no no no
maySeeBut-tonOr-derMove
PLM, PSM Button <Move order to line>visible: User may moveorder to a different line.
no no no no
maySeeBut-tonOrderTestrun
PLM Button <Order Testrun> isvisible.
no no no no
maySeeBut-tonPro-duction
PLM Button <Production> isvisible: User may enter theproduction menu
yes yes yes yes
maySeeBut-tonRe-connect
PLM Button <Reconnect> isvisible: User may reconnectdevices
no no no no
212 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
User Right PLM/PSM Description Level 3"adminis-trator"
Level 2"engineer"
Level 2"Supervisor" /"mechanic"
Level 1"operator"
maySeeBut-tonRe-moveErrorImages
PLM Button <Remove ErrorImages> is visible. Usermay delete error images.
no no no no
maySeeBut-tonRights
PLM Button <Rights> visible:User may enter the Userrights menu, to create/edit/delete User right settings
yes no no no
maySeeBut-tonSysconfig
PLM Button <System settings>visible: User may enter theSystem Settings menu
yes yes no no
maySeeBut-tonUser-Manager
PLM Button <User Management>is visible: User may enterthe User Management menu
yes no no no
maySeeER-POverXM-LImport
PLM User can configure xPath forERP data import
no no no no
maySeeEr-rorImages
PLM User can see camera errorimages
yes yes yes yes
maySeeMon-thNameList
PLM Button <Edit Month namelist> is visible. User can editMonth name List
no no no no
maySeeSec-SigConfig
PLM Button <Second signatureaction configuration> isvisible. User may configuresecond signature.
no no no no
maySeeSysInfo
PLM Button <System infor-mation> is visible: Usermay open the system infor-mation.
yes yes no no
mayShut-DownOS
PLM User may shut down thesystem
yes yes no no
mayShut-DownPilot
PLM User may shut down PLM.System returns to Windowslogon screen
yes yes no no
maySleep-ProdOrder
PLM Button <Sleep> visible:User may enter productionmenu while production issuspended
no no no no
mayStart-ProdOrder
PLM Button <Start Production viaOrder> visible: User maystart production via order
yes yes yes yes
mayStartTestRun
PLM Button <TestRun via LineFormat> visible: User maystart a test run
yes yes yes no
mayStop-ProdOrder
PLM Button <Finish> visible:User may stop and closeorders
yes yes yes yes
maySwitchLine
PLM Button <Switch Line>visible: User may switchbetween connected lines
no no no no
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 213 / 274
User Right PLM/PSM Description Level 3"adminis-trator"
Level 2"engineer"
Level 2"Supervisor" /"mechanic"
Level 1"operator"
mayTagUni-tAsQASample
PLM User may tag unit as aquality sample.
no no no no
mayUntagU-ni-tAsQASample
PLM User may untag unit as aquality sample.
no no no no
mayUseCen-tralWrapper
PLM User may use Centralwrapper module
mayVeri-fyUnits
PLM User may commissionfolding boxes with the handscanner.
no no no no
mayXmi-tOrderResult
PLM User may send productiondata to SAP
no no no no
MPAdmin PLM Megapixel administrator no no no no
MPLineop-erator
PLM Megapixel operator no no no no
MPProduct-manager
PLM Megapixel product manager no no no no
PlcAdmin PLM B&R PLC: AdministratorLevel
no no no no
PlcEngineer PLM B&R PLC: USER may edit/reset all parameters
no no no no
PlcOperator PLM B&R PLC: USER may start/stop and confirm messages
no no no no
PlcSu-pervisor
PLM B&R PLC: USER may editformats
no no no no
scaleLevel1 PLM User gets the OCS-check-weigher-rights Level 1
no no no no
scaleLevel2 PLM User gets the OCS-check-weigher-rights Level 2
no no no no
scaleLevel3 PLM User gets the OCS-check-weigher-rights Level 3
no no no no
useSQLAd-minManager
PLM User may use SQL adminpanel.(The setting is currently notused and will be removedin the future.)
no no no no
useStatistics PLM Button <Statistics> visible:User may access thestatistics menu
yes yes yes yes
useStatistic-sCounters
PLM Button <Statistics:Counters> visible: User mayaccess the countersstatistics panel
yes yes yes yes
useStatistic-sPQuality
PLM Button <Statistics: Printquality> visible: User mayaccess the print qualitystatistics
yes yes yes yes
214 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
13.2 Device Classes
Class DescriptionAC_NG2 Printer
APS Printer
AP_EXPORT_DATA
AZOmega Printer
AutolabelPrinter Printer
AveryPEM Printer
BluhmWeberJet Printer
CG54xx
CIV_BR_PLC
CIV_VDMA
CentralWrapper
CgxWrapper
CustomCilagPAgo Printer
DOMINO_A Printer
DOMINO_C Printer
DOMINO_D3 Printer
DOMINO_G200 Printer
DOMINO_V3 Printer
Datalogic_Scanner Handheld Scanner
Etipack_Plus Printer
FEIG_OBID RFID
FEIG_OBID_Writer RFID
Garvens_Weigher Checkweigher
Honeywell_Metro Handheld Scanner
Honeywell_Scanner Handheld Scanner
Imaje7031 Printer
KBAAlphaJetEvo Printer
KBAMetronic Printer
LinxLaserSL301 Printer
Logopack_LAN Printer
Logopak_VLP110 Printer
MES_ARC
MI_Cimjet Printer
MI_Labelpoint Printer
MI_SmartDate5 Printer
Metapace_Scanner Scanner
Metronic_AJC Printer
Metronic_AJD Printer
Motorola_Scanner Scanner
NLA_basic
OCS_Weigher Checkweigher
OpenDate Printer
PCE_ABSPLC PLC
PCE_AMQ_Exporter
PCE_CGX
PCE_DB_WATCHDOG Tool
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 215 / 274
Class DescriptionPCE_DECOM_FINALIZER Tool
PCE_DIALOG Tool
PCE_DIRECT_ARVATO Tool
PCE_DIRECT_XML Tool
PCE_EMAIL_NOTIFICATION Tool
PCE_ERP_REWORK Tool
PCE_EXPORT_DATA Tool
PCE_HRC Reader
PCE_HRC_LAN Reader
PCE_HRC_VDMAXML Reader
PCE_PCP PCE Central PalletizerThrough the PCP device it is possible to select the lineformat on the PLMwhich will be used later on the PCP. The PCP device in the lineformat willshow the needed AI configuration for the PCP lineformat, but it cannot beedited.
PCE_PF_AVIS PLC
PCE_PLC PLC
PCE_PSM_Exporter ToolThe module is a part of functionality that exports closed units to ERPsystem. The modules sends the ID of the unit to PSM just after it'scommission in PLM, without waiting of the order finalization.Parameters:• URL: http:// [YOUR-HOST]:8080/[PSM-CONTEXT-ROOT]/rest/orderunit-
closed/close• The URL to PSM Web Service that assepts the ID of the closed unit
(usually pallet) and sends the unit information to ERP system.• Rank: the rank of the units that should be sent to external ERP system.
PCE_RB Tool
PCE_REPORTER Tool
PCE_SMC Reader
PCE_SMC_PRC Reader
PCE_USDS
PCE_VGL6 Reader
PCE_VGL7 Reader
PCE_VGL8 Reader
PLC_Parameter_Setter
PLM_SERIAL_PLC Mode
PLM_SLAVE Mode
Pago Printer
PagoZebraEmulator
Palletizer_Extension Tool
Palletizer_RowExtension Tool
Rea_HRpro Printer
Redcube Printer
Rockwell_PLC PLC
Sato_e_Pro Printer
Sick_CLV6xx Scanner
Siemens_PLC_MPI PLC
Siemens_PLC_PPI PLC
216 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Class DescriptionSiemens_PLC_TCPIP PLC
Snitcher PLC
TampoPrint_SPS Printer
UPS UPS
VJDFDual
VJ_1510CIJ Printer
VJ_ZipherText Printer
VideoJetDataflex Printer
VirtualPrinter_CentralWrapper
Wolke_M600_Advanced Printer
Wolke_M600_OEM Printer
Zebra_170xiIII Printer
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 217 / 274
13.3 AI ManagementWithin this menu you can adapt the PCE Line Manager to your particular requirements. If the checkmark inthe column 'Enabled' is set, the application identifier (AI) is activated, will be recognized and can be usedby the PLM. To edit the AI Management settings press Production > AI Management:.
NOTICEDynamic AIs: no ValidationDynamic AIs do not contain static data and are ignored from order data validation.
List of Application Identifiers
AI Name Description Type Format Min-Max## DMX GS1 Datamatrix Code CODE 01-21-17-10 0-255
##AS ASSEMBLE AI assembling data field CODE R00-10 0-255
##BC GS1 BARCODE128 GS1-128 barcode CODE 01-21 0-255
##CO CODE128 CODE-128 barcode CODE 17-10-30 0-255
##HR HUMAN READABLE Human Readable Text CODE 01-21 0-255
##RF RFID EPC EPC Code CODE 01-21 0-255
00 SSCC SSCC (Serial ShippingContainer Code)
NUMBER n18 18-18
01 GTIN Global Trade ItemNumber (GTIN)
NUMBER n14 14-14
01C CIP Club Inter-Pharma-ceutique
NUMBER n13+n..1 13-14
02 CONTENT GTIN GTIN of Contained TradeItems
NUMBER n14 14-14
10 BATCH/LOT Batch or Lot Number ISO646 x..20 0-20
11 PROD DATE Production Date(YYMMDD)
DATE yyMMdd 7-10
12 DUE DATE Due Date (YYMMDD) DATE yyMMdd 7-10
13 PACK DATE Packaging Date(YYMMDD)
DATE yyMMdd 7-10
15 BEST BEFORE Best Before Date(YYMMDD)
DATE yyMMdd 7-10
16 SELL BY Sell By Date (YYMMDD) DATE yyMMdd 7-10
16D PPN_MANF_DATE Manufacturing Date(PPN)[YYYYMMDD]
DATE yyyyMMdd 8-10
218 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AI Name Description Type Format Min-Max17 USE BY OR EXPIRY Expiration Date
(YYMMDD)DATE yyMMdd 7-10
1T PPN_LOT Batch or Lot Number(PPN)
ISO646 x..20 0-20
20 VARIANT Variant Number NUMBER n2 2-2
21 SERIAL Serial Number ISO646 x..20 0-20
22 QTY /DATE /BATCH Secondary Data Fields CODE 30(5)-17(MMyy)-10
0-29
240 ADDITIONAL ID Additional Item Identifi-cation
ISO646 x..30 0-30
241 CUST. PART NO. Customer Part Number ISO646 x..30 0-30
242 MTO VARIANT Made-to-Order VariationNumber
NUMBER n..6 0-6
243 PCN Packaging ComponentNumber
ISO646 x..20 0-20
250 SECONDARY SERIAL Secondary SerialNumber
ISO646 x..30 0-30
251 REF. TO SOURCE Reference to SourceEntity
ISO646 x..30 0-30
253 GDTI Global Document TypeIdentifier (GDTI)
NUMBER n13+n..17 13-30
254 GLN EXTENSION GLN ExtensionComponent
ISO646 x..20 0-20
255 GCN Global Coupon Number(GCN)
NUMBER n13+n..12 13-25
30 VAR. COUNT Count of Items (VariableMeasure Trade Item)
NUMBER n..8 0-8
310Y NET WEIGHT (kg) Net weight, kilograms(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
311Y LENGTH (m) Length of firstdimension, metres(Variable Measure TradeItem
DECIMAL n6 6-7
312Y WIDTH (m) Width, diametre, orsecond dimension,metres (VariableMeasure Trade Item)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
313Y HEIGHT (m) Depth, thickness, height,or third dimension,metres (VariableMeasure Trade Item)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
314Y AREA (m²) Area, square metres(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
315Y NET VOLUME (l) Net volume, litres(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
316Y NET VOLUME (m³) Net volume, cubicmetres (VariableMeasure Trade Item)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
320Y NET WEIGHT (lb) Net weight, pounds(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 219 / 274
AI Name Description Type Format Min-Max321Y LENGTH (i) Length or first
dimension, inches(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
322Y LENGTH (f) Length or firstdimension, feet (VariableMeasure Trade Item)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
323Y LENGTH (y) Length or firstdimension, yards(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
324Y WIDTH (i) Width, diametre, orsecond dimension,inches (VariableMeasure Trade Item)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
325Y WIDTH (f) Width, diametre, orsecond dimension, feet(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
326Y WIDTH (y) Width, diametre, orsecond dimension,yards (Variable MeasureTrade Item
DECIMAL n6 6-7
327Y HEIGHT (i) Depth, thickness, height,or third dimension,inches (VariableMeasure Trade Item)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
328Y HEIGHT (f) Depth, thickness, height,or third dimension, feet(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
329Y HEIGHT (y) Depth, thickness, height,or third dimension, yards(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
330Y GROSS WEIGHT (kg) Logistic weight,kilograms
DECIMAL n6 6-7
331Y LENGTH (m), log Length or firstdimension, metres
DECIMAL n6 6-7
332Y WIDTH (m), log Width, diametre, orsecond dimension,metres
DECIMAL n6 6-7
333Y HEIGHT (m), log Depth, thickness, height,or third dimension,metres
DECIMAL n6 6-7
334Y AREA (m²), log Area, square metres DECIMAL n6 6-7
335Y VOLUME (l), log Logistic volume, litres DECIMAL n6 6-7
336Y VOLUME (m³), log Logistic volume, cubiclitres
DECIMAL n6 6-7
337Y KG PER m² Kilograms per squaremetre
DECIMAL n6 6-7
340Y GROSS WEIGHT (lb) Logistic weight, pounds DECIMAL n6 6-7
341Y LENGTH (i), log Length or firstdimension, inches
DECIMAL n6 6-7
220 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AI Name Description Type Format Min-Max342Y LENGTH (f), log Length or first
dimension, feetDECIMAL n6 6-7
343Y LENGTH (y), log Length or firstdimension, yards
DECIMAL n6 6-7
344Y WIDTH (i), log Width, diametre, orsecond dimension
DECIMAL n6 6-7
345Y WIDTH (f), log Width, diametre, orsecond dimension
DECIMAL n6 6-7
346Y WIDTH (y), log Width, diametre, orsecond dimension
DECIMAL n6 6-7
347Y HEIGHT (i), log Depth, thickness, height,or third dimension
DECIMAL n6 6-7
348Y HEIGHT (f), log Depth, thickness, height,or third dimension
DECIMAL n6 6-7
349Y HEIGHT (y), log Depth, thickness, height,or third dimension
DECIMAL n6 6-7
350Y AREA (i²) Area, square inches(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
351Y AREA (f²) Area, square feet(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
352Y AREA (y²) Area, square yards(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
353Y AREA (i²), log Area, square inches DECIMAL n6 6-7
354Y AREA (f²), log Area, square feet DECIMAL n6 6-7
355Y AREA (y²), log Area, square yards DECIMAL n6 6-7
356Y NET WEIGHT (t) Net weight, troy ounces(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
357Y NET VOLUME (oz) Net weight (or volume),ounces (VariableMeasure Trade Item)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
360Y NET VOLUME (q) Net volume, quarts(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
361Y NET VOLUME (g) Net volume, gallons U.S.(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
362Y VOLUME (q), log Logistic volume, quarts DECIMAL n6 6-7
363Y VOLUME (g), log Logistic volume, gallonsU.S.
DECIMAL n6 6-7
364Y VOLUME (i³) Net volume, cubicinches (VariableMeasure Trade Item)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
365Y VOLUME (f³) Net volume, cubic feet(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
366Y VOLUME (y³) Net volume, cubic yards(Variable Measure TradeItem)
DECIMAL n6 6-7
367Y VOLUME (i³), log Logistic volume, cubicinches
DECIMAL n6 6-7
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 221 / 274
AI Name Description Type Format Min-Max368Y VOLUME (f), log Logistic volume, cubic
feetDECIMAL n6 6-7
369Y VOLUME (y), log Logistic volume, cubicyards
DECIMAL n6 6-7
37 CONTENT SIZE Number of UnitsContained
NUMBER n..8 0-8
390Y AMOUNT Applicable AmountPayable, local currency
DECIMAL n..15 0-16
391Y AMOUNT Applicable AmountPayable with ISOCurrency Code
DECIMAL n3+n..15 3-19
392Y PRICE Applicable AmountPayable, singlemonetary area (VariableMeasure Trade Item)
DECIMAL n..15 0-16
393Y PRICE Applicable AmountPayable with ISOCurrency Code (VariableMeasure Trade Item)
DECIMAL n3+n..15 3-19
394Y PRCNT OFF DECIMAL
400 ORDER NUMBER Customers PurchaseOrder Number
ISO646 x..30 0-30
401 GINC Consignment Number ISO646 x..30 0-30
402 GSIN Shipment IdentificationNumber
NUMBER n17 17-17
403 ROUTE Routing Code ISO646 x..30 0-30
410 SHIP TO LOC Ship to – Deliver toGlobal Location Number
NUMBER n13 13-13
411 BILL TO Bill to – Invoice to GlobalLocation Number
NUMBER n13 13-13
412 PURCHASE FROM Purchased from GlobalLocation Number
NUMBER n13 13-13
413 SHIP FOR LOC Ship for – Deliver for –Forward to GlobalLocation Number
NUMBER n13 13-13
414 LOC No Identification of aPhysical Location –Global Location Number
NUMBER n13 13-13
415 PAY TO Global Location Numberof the Invoicing Party
NUMBER n13 13-13
416 PROD/SERV LOC NUMBER
420 SHIP TO POST Ship to – Deliver toPostal Code Within aSingle Postal Authority
ISO646 x..20 0-20
421 SHIP TO POST Ship to – Deliver toPostal Code with ISOCountry Code
ISO646 n3+x..9 3-12
422 ORIGIN Country of Origin of aTrade Item
NUMBER n3 3-3
423 COUNTRY – INITIALPROCESS.
Country of InitialProcessing
NUMBER n3+n..12 3-15
424 COUNTRY – PROCESS. Country of Processing NUMBER n3 3-3
425 COUNTRY – DISAS-SEMBLY
Country of Disassembly NUMBER n3 3-3
222 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AI Name Description Type Format Min-Max426 COUNTRY – FULL
PROCESSCountry Covering fullProcess Chain
NUMBER n3 3-3
427 ORIGIN SUBDIVISION Country Subdivision ofOrigin
ISO646 x..3 0-3
7001 NSN NATO Stock Number(NSN)
NUMBER n13 13-13
7002 MEAT CUT UN/ECE Meat Carcassesand Cuts Classification
ISO646 x..30 0-30
7003 EXPIRY TIME Expiration Date and Time DATETIME yyyyMMddHHmm 8-12
7004 ACTIVE POTENCY Active Potency NUMBER n..4 0-4
7005 CATCH AREA Catch Area ISO646 x..12 0-12
7006 FIRST FREEZE DATE First Freeze Date(YYMMDD)
DATE yyMMdd 7-10
7007 HARVEST DATE Harvest Date(YYMMDD[YYMMDD])
NUMBER n6+n..6 6-12
7008 AQUATIC SPECIES Species for FisheryPurposes
ISO646 x..3 0-3
7009 FISHING GEAR TYPE Fishing Gear Type ISO646 x..10 0-10
7010 PROD METHOD Production Method ISO646 x..2 0-2
7020 REFURB LOT ISO646
7021 FUNC STAT ISO646
7022 REV STAT ISO646
7023 GIAI – ASSEMBLY ISO646
7030 PROCESSOR #0 Approval Number ofProcessor with ISOCountry Code
ISO646 n3+x..27 3-30
7031 PROCESSOR #1 Approval Number ofProcessor with ISOCountry Code
ISO646 n3+x..27 3-30
7032 PROCESSOR #2 Approval Number ofProcessor with ISOCountry Code
ISO646 n3+x..27 3-30
7033 PROCESSOR #3 Approval Number ofProcessor with ISOCountry Code
ISO646 n3+x..27 3-30
7034 PROCESSOR #4 Approval Number ofProcessor with ISOCountry Code
ISO646 n3+x..27 3-30
7035 PROCESSOR #5 Approval Number ofProcessor with ISOCountry Code
ISO646 n3+x..27 3-30
7036 PROCESSOR #6 Approval Number ofProcessor with ISOCountry Code
ISO646 n3+x..27 3-30
7037 PROCESSOR #7 Approval Number ofProcessor with ISOCountry Code
ISO646 n3+x..27 3-30
7038 PROCESSOR #8 Approval Number ofProcessor with ISOCountry Code
ISO646 n3+x..27 3-30
7039 PROCESSOR #9 Approval Number ofProcessor with ISOCountry Code
ISO646 n3+x..27 3-30
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 223 / 274
AI Name Description Type Format Min-Max710 NHRN PZN National Healthcare
Reimbursement Number(NHRN) – Germany PZN
ISO646 x..20 0-20
711 NHRN CIP National HealthcareReimbursement Number(NHRN) – France CIP
ISO646 x..20 0-20
712 NHRN CN National HealthcareReimbursement Number(NHRN) – Spain CN
ISO646 x..20 0-20
713 NHRN DRN National HealthcareReimbursement Number(NHRN) – Brasil DRN
ISO646 x..20 0-20
8001 DIMENSIONS Roll Products (Width,Length, Core Diametre,Direction, Splices)
NUMBER n14 14-14
8002 CMT No Cellular MobileTelephone Identifier
ISO646 x..20 0-20
8003 GRAI Global Returnable AssetIdentifier (GRAI)
ISO646 n14+x..16 14-30
8004 GIAI Global Individual AssetIdentifier (GIAI)
ISO646 x..30 0-30
8005 PRICE PER UNIT Price Per Unit of Measure NUMBER n6 6-6
8006 GCTIN Identification of theComponents of a TradeItem
NUMBER n14+n2+n2 18-18
8007 IBAN International BankAccount Number (IBAN)
ISO646 x..34 0-34
8008 PROD TIME Date and Time ofProduction
DATETIME yyyyMMddHHmm 8-12
8010 CPID Global Service RelationNumber (GSRN)
ISO646 x..30 0-30
8011 CPID SERIAL Global Service RelationNumber (GSRN)
NUMBER n..12 0-12
8012 VERSION Software version ISO646 x..20 0-20
8017 GSRN – PROVIDER Global Service RelationNumber (GSRN)
NUMBER n18 18-18
8018 GSRN – RECIPIENT Global Service RelationNumber (GSRN)
NUMBER n18 18-18
8019 SRIN Service Relation InstanceNumber (SRIN)
NUMBER n..10 0-10
8020 REF No Payment Slip ReferenceNumber
ISO646 x..25 0-25
8100 - GS1-128 CouponExtended Code
NUMBER n6 6-6
8101 - GS1-128 CouponExtended Code
NUMBER n1+n5+n4 10-10
8102 - GS1-128 CouponExtended Code
NUMBER n1+n1 2-2
8110 - Coupon Code Identifi-cation for Use in NorthAmerica
ISO646 x..70 0-70
8111 POINTS Loyalty points of acoupon
NUMBER n4 4-4
8112 COUPON CODE ISO646 x..30 0-30
224 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AI Name Description Type Format Min-Max8200 PRODUCT URL Extended Packaging URL ISO646 x..70 0-70
8P PPN_GTIN Global Trade ItemNumber (PPN)
NUMBER n14 14-14
90 INTERNAL Information MutuallyAgreed Between TradingPartners
ISO646 x..30 0-30
91 INTERNAL Company Internal Infor-mation
ISO646 x..30 0-30
92 INTERNAL Company Internal Infor-mation
ISO646 x..30 0-30
93 INTERNAL Company Internal Infor-mation
ISO646 x..30 0-30
94 INTERNAL Company Internal Infor-mation
ISO646 x..30 0-30
95 INTERNAL Company Internal Infor-mation
ISO646 x..30 0-30
96 INTERNAL Company Internal Infor-mation
ISO646 x..30 0-30
97 INTERNAL Company Internal Infor-mation
ISO646 x..30 0-30
98 INTERNAL Company Internal Infor-mation
ISO646 x..30 0-30
99 INTERNAL Company Internal Infor-mation
ISO646 x..30 0-30
9N PPN Pharmacy ProductNumber (PPN)
ALNUM an..22 4-22
B01 AIC AIC Code NUMBER n9 9-9
B02 BOLLINI Bollini Vignette NUMBER n9 9-9
B03 BELG CODE Belgium Vignette NUMBER n15 15-15
B04 READER OFFSET Code Reader OffsetCount
NUMBER n2 0-2
CH01 PRODUCT CODE China Product Code NUMBER n..20 0-20
CH02 RESOURCE CODE China Resource Code NUMBER n..20 0-20
CH03 SUB TYPE China Sub Type NUMBER n..10 0-10
CH04 ACTOR China Actor STRING x..20 0-20
CH05 CORP ORDER ID China Corp. Order ID STRING x..20 0-20
CH06 TO CORP ID China to Corp. ID STRING x..20 0-20
CH07 PACKAGE RATIO China Package Ratio STRING x..20 0-20
CH08 CODE VERSION China Code Version NUMBER n..5 0-5
CH09 PACKAGE SPEC Package Specification forChina Export
NUMBER n..5 0-5
CH10 WORKSHOP Workshop for ChinaExport
STRING x..20 0-20
CH11 LINE MANAGER LineManager for ChinaExport
STRING x..20 0-20
CH12 FROM CORP ID From Corp ID for ChinaExport
STRING x..20 0-20
CH13 DRUG TYPE Drug Type for ChinaExport
STRING x..20 0-20
CH14 COMMENT Comment for ChinaExport
STRING x..20 0-20
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 225 / 274
AI Name Description Type Format Min-MaxCH15 ALT CORP ID Alt. Corp. Order ID for
China ExportSTRING x..20 0-20
CI01 INIT CHANGEABLE initial changeable value STRING x..255 0-255
CX01 REPEAT CHANGABLE repeatable changeablevalue
STRING x..255 0-255
D PPN_EXP_DATE Expiration Date (PPN)[YYMMDD]
DATE yyMMdd 6-10
DC01 DEVICE COUNTER Printer or reader devicecounter
NUMBER n..10 3-10
F11 FAST CODE DATE yyMMdd 6-10
F21 FAST CODE FAST Coding type STRING x51 0-51
PZN7 PZN_7 Pharmazentralnummer(7)
NUMBER n7 7-7
PZN8 PZN_8 Pharmazentralnummer(8)
NUMBER n8 8-8
R00 RANK NAME Rank Description STRING x..20 0-20
R01 SER ALGO Serialization Algorithm STRING x..20 0-20
R02 SER PREFIX Fix Serial Prefix ISO646 x..20 0-20
R03 SER LENGTH Serial Number Length NUMBER n2 0-2
R04 SSCC PACK ID SSCC pack type NUMBER n1 0-1
R05 COMP PREFIX Company Prefix NUMBER n4+n..8 4-12
R06 PROD QUANTITY Target productionquantity
NUMBER n..10 0-10
R07 PROD NAME External Product Name STRING x..64 0-64
R08 ORDER NAME External Order Name STRING x..64 0-64
R09 LINEFORMAT NAME External LineformatName
STRING x..64 0-64
R10 LINE NAME External Line Name STRING x..64 0-64
R11 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION External ProductDescription
STRING x..64 0-64
R12 SGTIN EPC GS1 SGTIN EPC Hex STRING x..100 0-100
R13 SSCC EPC GS1 SSCC EPC Hex STRING x..100 0-100
R14 PROD CODE REF product code reference STRING x..20 0-20
R15 UNIT LAST CHANGED last changed Date DATE yyMMdd 7-10
R16 ORDER DESCRIPTION External OrderDescription
STRING x..64 0-64
R17 RND TAIL LEN randomized serial suffixlength
NUMBER n..2 0-2
R18 PRODUCT CODE common product code ISO646 x..20 0-20
R21 HELPER CODE Helpercode Number ISO646 x..20 0-20
R22 HC ALGO Helpercode Algorithm STRING x..20 0-20
R23 HC LENGTH Helpercode NumberLength
NUMBER n2 0-2
R24 HC PREFIX Fix Helpercode Prefix STRING x..20 0-20
R25 SSCC PREFIX Combined R04 and R05 NUMBER n..10 0-10
R36 LAYER SIZE Content Size of oneLayer
NUMBER n..10 0-10
R37 CONTENT COUNT Children Content Size NUMBER n..10 0-10
R370 BASE UNIT COUNT NUMBER n..10 0-10
R371 ITEM COUNT Rank 1 Content Size NUMBER n..10 0-10
226 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AI Name Description Type Format Min-MaxR372 BUNDLE COUNT Rank 2 Content Size NUMBER n..10 0-10
R373 CASE COUNT Rank 3 Content Size NUMBER n..10 0-10
R374 RANK4 COUNT Rank 4 Content Size NUMBER n..10 0-10
R38 PRODCODE POOL MIN pool minimum forproduct code serial listor ranges
NUMBER n..10 0-10
R381 ITEMS IN INCOMPL.CASES
NUMBER n..10 0-10
R383 INCOMPLETE CASES NUMBER n..10 0-10
R39 PRODCODE POOL MAX pool maximum forproduct code sserial listor ranges
NUMBER n..10 0-10
R40 SGTIN POOL MIN pool minimum for sgtinranges
NUMBER n..10 0-10
R41 SGTIN POOL MAX pool maximum for sgtinranges
NUMBER n..10 0-10
R42 SSCC POOL MIN pool minimum for ssccranges
NUMBER n..10 0-10
R43 SSCC POOL MAX pool maximum for ssccranges
NUMBER n..10 0-10
R44 SGTIN POOL LINE pool line for sgtin ranges NUMBER n..10 0-10
R45 SSCC POOL LINE pool line for sscc ranges NUMBER n..10 0-10
R46 PRODCODE POOL LINE pool line for productcode serial list or ranges
NUMBER n..10 0-10
R47 GOOD PRODUCTOUTPUT
NUMBER n..10 0-10
R48 SER EXT Serial GeneratorExtension
ISO646 x..20 0-20
R50 Order export destinationmodule name
STRING x..255 0-255
R51 Product owner name STRING x..255 0-255
R52 PLC format STRING x..255 0-255
S PPN_SERIAL Serial Number (PPN) ALNUM an..20 0-20
X01 - Custom Value 01 STRING x..255 0-255
X02 - Custom Value 02 STRING x..255 0-255
X03 - Custom Value 03 STRING x..255 0-255
X04 - Custom Value 04 STRING x..255 0-255
X05 - Custom Value 05 STRING x..255 0-255
X06 - Custom Value 06 STRING x..255 0-255
X07 - Custom Value 07 STRING x..255 0-255
X08 - Custom Value 08 STRING x..255 0-255
X09 - Custom Value 09 STRING x..255 0-255
X10 - Custom Value 10 STRING x..255 0-255
X11 - Custom Value 11 STRING x..255 0-255
X12 - Custom Value 12 STRING x..255 0-255
X13 - Custom Value 13 STRING x..255 0-255
X14 - Custom Value 14 STRING x..255 0-255
X15 - Custom Value 15 STRING x..255 0-255
X16 - Custom Value 16 STRING x..255 0-255
X17 - Custom Value 17 STRING x..255 0-255
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 227 / 274
AI Name Description Type Format Min-MaxX18 - Custom Value 18 STRING x..255 0-255
X19 - Custom Value 19 STRING x..255 0-255
X20 - Custom Value 20 STRING x..255 0-255
X21 - Custom Value 21 STRING x..255 0-255
X22 - Custom Value 22 STRING x..255 0-255
Fields based on Application Identifiers can be defined with “Regular Expressions” (see chapter [RegularExpressions } Page 244]).Fields based on date values can be defined with Month name lists (MNL) and with Date time patterns (seechapter [Date Values } Page 247]).
228 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
13.4 ReportsYou can print or export multiple reports, that show different data of the production. The following reportsexist:
Report Description Selection Path for templateBollini Report Shows the serial numbers
of all produced items andtheir status.
Production > Order resultscreate report > select anexisting order > PDF Report >Select report
Pilot/bin/pdf/summary_order
China OrderReport
Shows the serial numbersof all produced items andtheir status.
French OrderReport
Shows the coding data ofthe French order.
Order CountersReport
Shows the counters(good/bad) of all readersfor the selectedproduction.
OrderSummaryReport
Shows all settings of theorder and first and lastserial number for eachrank (if used).
HierarchyReport
Shows the hierarchy andserial number of eachproduced item.
Line FormatReport
Shows all settings for theline format.
Production > Add/Edit lineformat > select an existing format> PDF Report
/Pilot/pdf/configuration
Logfile Report Shows all entries into thelogfile during theproduction.
Logfile Management > Print /Pilot/bin/pdf/logfile
Order ConfirmReport
Shows all settings at thebeginning of theproduction.
Start production via order> select an existing order > PDFReport
/Pilot/bin/pdf/confirm_order
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 229 / 274
13.4.1 Bollini Report
230 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
13.4.2 China Serial Report
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 231 / 274
232 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
13.4.3 French Order Report
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 233 / 274
13.4.4 Order Counter Report
234 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 235 / 274
236 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
13.4.5 Order Summary Report
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 237 / 274
238 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
13.4.6 Hierarchy Report
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 239 / 274
13.4.7 Line Format Report
240 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
13.4.8 Logfile Report
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 241 / 274
242 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
13.4.9 Order Confirm Report
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 243 / 274
13.5 Regular Expressions
Construct Matches
Charactersx The character x
\\ The backslash character
\0n The character with octal value 0n (0 <= n <= 7)
\0nn The character with octal value 0nn (0 <= n <= 7)
\0mnn The character with octal value 0mnn (0 <= m <= 3, 0 <= n <= 7)
\xhh The character with hexadecimal value 0xhh
\uhhhh The character with hexadecimal value 0xhhhh
\t The tab character ('\u0009')
\n The newline (line feed) character ('\u000A')
\r The carriage-return character ('\u000D')
\f The form-feed character ('\u000C')
\a The alert (bell) character ('\u0007')
\e The escape character ('\u001B')
\cx The control character corresponding to x
Character classes[abc] a, b, or c (simple class)
[^abc] Any character except a, b, or c (negation)
[a-zA-Z] a through z or A through Z, inclusive (range)
[a-d[m-p]] a through d, or m through p: [a-dm-p] (union)
[a-z&&[def]] d, e, or f (intersection)
[a-z&&[^bc]] a through z, except for b and c: [ad-z] (subtraction)
[a-z&&[^m-p]] a through z, and not m through p: [a-lq-z](subtraction)
Predefined character classes. Any character (may or may not match line terminators)
\d A digit: [0-9]
\D A non-digit: [^0-9]
\s A whitespace character: [ \t\n\x0B\f\r]
\S A non-whitespace character: [^\s]
\w A word character: [a-zA-Z_0-9]
\W A non-word character: [^\w]
POSIX character classes (US-ASCII only)\p{Lower} A lower-case alphabetic character: [a-z]
\p{Upper} An upper-case alphabetic character:[A-Z]
\p{ASCII} All ASCII:[\x00-\x7F]
\p{Alpha} An alphabetic character:[\p{Lower}\p{Upper}]
\p{Digit} A decimal digit: [0-9]
\p{Alnum} An alphanumeric character:[\p{Alpha}\p{Digit}]
\p{Punct} Punctuation: One of !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~
\p{Graph} A visible character: [\p{Alnum}\p{Punct}]
\p{Print} A printable character: [\p{Graph}\x20]
\p{Blank} A space or a tab: [ \t]
\p{Cntrl} A control character: [\x00-\x1F\x7F]
\p{XDigit} A hexadecimal digit: [0-9a-fA-F]
\p{Space} A whitespace character: [ \t\n\x0B\f\r]
java.lang.Character classes (simple java character type)
244 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
\p{javaLowerCase} Equivalent to java.lang.Character.isLowerCase()
\p{javaUpperCase} Equivalent to java.lang.Character.isUpperCase()
\p{javaWhitespace} Equivalent to java.lang.Character.isWhitespace()
\p{javaMirrored} Equivalent to java.lang.Character.isMirrored()
Classes for Unicode blocks and categories\p{InGreek} A character in the Greek block (simple block)
\p{Lu} An uppercase letter (simple category)
\p{Sc} A currency symbol
\P{InGreek} Any character except one in the Greek block (negation)
[\p{L}&&[^\p{Lu}]] Any letter except an uppercase letter (subtraction)
Boundary matchers^ The beginning of a line
$ The end of a line
\b A word boundary
\B A non-word boundary
\A The beginning of the input
\G The end of the previous match
\Z The end of the input but for the final terminator, if any
\z The end of the input
Greedy quantifiersX? X, once or not at all
X* X, zero or more times
X+ X, one or more times
X{n} X, exactly n times
X{n,} X, at least n times
X{n,m} X, at least n but not more than m times
Reluctant quantifiersX?? X, once or not at all
X*? X, zero or more times
X+? X, one or more times
X{n}? X, exactly n times
X{n,}? X, at least n times
X{n,m}? X, at least n but not more than m times
Possessive quantifiersX?+ X, once or not at all
X*+ X, zero or more times
X++ X, one or more times
X{n}+ X, exactly n times
X{n,}+ X, at least n times
X{n,m}+ X, at least n but not more than m times
Logical operatorsXY X followed by Y
X|Y Either X or Y
(X) X, as a capturing group
Back references\n Whatever the nth capturing group matched
Quotation\ Nothing, but quotes the following character
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 245 / 274
\Q Nothing, but quotes all characters until \E
\E Nothing, but ends quoting started by \Q
Special constructs (non-capturing)(?:X) X, as a non-capturing group
(?idmsux-idmsux) Nothing, but turns match flags i d m s u x on - off
(?idmsux-idmsux:X) X, as a non-capturing group with the given flags i d m s u x on - off
(?=X) X, via zero-width positive lookahead
(?!X) X, via zero-width negative lookahead
(?<=X) X, via zero-width positive lookbehind
(?<!X) X, via zero-width negative lookbehind
(?>X) X, as an independent, non-capturing group
246 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
13.6 Date ValuesMNL01: JAN;FEB;MRZ;APR;MAI;JUN;JUL;AUG;SEP;OKT;NOV;DEZMNL02: Jan;Feb;Mrz;Apr;Mai;Jun;Jul;Aug;Sep;Okt;Nov;DezMNL03: Jan.;Feb.;Mar.;Apr.;May;June;July;Aug.;Sept.;Oct.;Nov.;Dec.MNL04: Q1;Q1;Q1;Q2;Q2;Q2;Q3;Q3;Q3;Q4;Q4;Q4
Letter Date or Time Component Presentation Examples G Era designator Text AD
y Year Year 1996; 96
Y Week year (A week year is a yearwhere all the weeks in the year arewhole weeks.)
Year 2009; 09
M Month in year Month July; Jul; 07
w Week in year Number 27
W Week in month Number 2
D Day in year Number 189
d Day in month Number 10
F Day of week in month Number 2
E Day name in week Text Tuesday; Tue
u Day number of week (1 =Monday, ..., 7 = Sunday)
Number 1
a Am/pm marker Text PM
H Hour in day (0-23) Number 0
k Hour in day (1-24) Number 24
K Hour in am/pm (0-11) Number 0
h Hour in am/pm (1-12) Number 12
m Minute in hour Number 30
s Second in minute Number 55
S Millisecond Number 978
z Time zone General time zone Pacific Standard Time; PST;GMT-08:00
Z Time zone RFC 822 time zone -0800
X Time zone ISO 8601 time zone -08; -0800; -08:00
Examples:
Date and Time Pattern Result "yyyy.MM.dd G 'at' HH:mm:ss z" 2001.07.04 AD at 12:08:56 PDT
"EEE, MMM d, ''yy" Wed, Jul 4, '01
"h:mm a" 12:08 PM
"hh 'o''clock' a, zzzz" 12 o'clock PM, Pacific Daylight Time
"K:mm a, z" 0:08 PM, PDT
"yyyyy.MMMMM.dd GGG hh:mm aaa" 02001.July.04 AD 12:08 PM
"EEE, d MMM yyyy HH:mm:ss Z" Wed, 4 Jul 2001 12:08:56 -0700
"yyMMddHHmmssZ" 010704120856-0700
"yyyy-MM-dd'T'HH:mm:ss.SSSZ" 2001-07-04T12:08:56.235-0700
"yyyy-MM-dd'T'HH:mm:ss.SSSXXX" 2001-07-04T12:08:56.235-07:00
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 247 / 274
13.7 Supported PrintersThe printers in the list below are supported. But note that some printers are restricted within their use (e.g.no aggregation printer).
Printer type Manufacturer Models RemarksDODDrop On Demand
Wolke (Videojet) m600 advanced, m600 oem, m600 touch (2)
Domino G Series
REA REA HR Jet
Bluhm Weber X1Jet, X4Jet
Atlantic Zeiser Omega i36 (1)
Domino C Series (1), (2),(4)
CIJContinuous Ink Jet
KBA-Metronic Alphajet D (1)
Videojet Videojet VJ 1510CIJ, 1610CIJ, 1620CIJ (1), (4)
Videojet VJ 1550CIJ, 1650CIJ (1)
CO2-Laser Domino D320i (D Series)
KBA-Metronic K-1000 SP / PLUS (10/30 Watt) (1)
Videojet VJ 3120, VJ 3320, VJ 3430
Linx SL101, SL301
Alltec LC100, LC300, LC500
TTOThermal TransferOverhead
Markem Imaje SmartDate 5, X40, X50, X60
CIMJET 334 (1), (4)
Videojet Dataflex Plus
AC Codiergeräte NGT+ (4)
Avery Dennison Avery PEM (2), (3)
Logopak VLP110 (1)
Zebra 170xiIII, 170Xi4, R110Xi4, R110PAX4 (2), (3)
Sato M8490Se, CL608e, S84-ex (2)
Autolabel D43, T43 (2), (4)
Printer Interface NiceLabel e.g. Zebra, AveryPEM, ... (1), (2),(4)
(1) Please clarify all requirements in advance.(2) May be used as aggregation printer.(3) May be used on different ranks in the same line format ("virtual device").(4) No printer buffer for serial numbers.
248 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
13.8 Abbreviations and TermsABS Advanced Bundle Station
AI Application Identifier
Auto-Logout Logged in PCE Line Manager users will be automatically logged out after a certainperiod of inactivity. This period can be set in the system settings. This preventsunauthorized access to areas protected by the authorization system.
BAK Bundle Aggregation Kit
CAK Case Aggregation Kit
COM Serial interfaces for bidirectional data transfer between the PC and peripheral devices.
CSK Carton Serialization Kit
DB Database
XMV Datamatrix Station XMV
FDA 21 CFR Part 11 FDA is the abbreviation for Food and Drug Administration, which is an organizationof the US Department of Health and Human Services. The FDA makes regulations formanufacturers of pharmaceutical and food products in order to protect the health ofthe consumers. It also checks for compliance with these regulations. CFR is theabbreviation for Code of Federal Regulations. All of the regulations of the Americanlegal system are contained in this massive document. The number 21 is the shortform for Title 21, Chapter I and the number 11 is the abbreviated designation for Part11. Part 11 deals with electronic records and electronic signatures. The full title is:Code of Federal Regulations: Food and Drug Administration Title 21, Chapter I, Part11-Electronic Records; Electronic Signatures
ERP System Enterprise Resource Planning System (typically order transaction
GS1 Global Standards One
Item An item is the smallest unit at the aggregation process. This can be a folding box ora blister. It is usually aggregated to a bundle or directly to a shipping case.
LAN Local Area Network, network for data exchange between devices
Log file Automatically generated record file
MAS Manual Aggregation Station
HRC AI-CORE High Resolution Camera Software (AI = Aggregation Inspection)
OCV Optical Character Verification
Order report A report issued after the end of production, which contains the batch data and astatistic for the monitoring results (good/total) of the individual monitoring devices.
PAK Pallet Aggregation Kit
PCE Pharmacontrol Electronic GmbH
PLM PCE Line ManagerPLC Programmable logic controller
PSM PCE Site ManagerRank At each aggregation rank, unambiguous assignment of units to parent-child aggre-
gation levels is done.
SMC Smart Camera
SCS Shipping Case Station
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A protocol combination thatcombines transport and routing in one network connection.
Unit A unit is the result of an aggregation level. The term unit is used for an item, abundle, a shipping case or a pallet
VDMA Association of German Mechanical and Systems Engineers
VDMAXML_P Norm for the integration of intelligent components in packaging machines andprocessing machines: data exchange structuring with regard to the standards of 21CFR 11, Standardized Communication (VDMAXML_P Version 1.0)
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 249 / 274
13.9 Troubleshooting Guide
WARNINGTrained personnel onlyBefore attempting any corrective action, be sure that the person doing the action has beentrained on the PCE Line Manager and has read the entire operator manual. Failure to doso can result in injury and/or property damage. Corrective actions denoted with "MTService Technician" should not be attempted by operators or in-house technicians.
This Troubleshooting Guide is intended to be used by operators and in-house technicians that have beentrained on the PCE Line Manager. It covers the basic symptoms and most usual fixes to failures that mayoccur on the PLM.This Guide can be applied to all machines with a PLM that have been installed by a trained METTLERTOLEDO service technician.
DisclaimerThis list contains a selected subset of the actual alarm list. There is no assurance that the data presentedhere is complete.Due to its generic character, it might not serve as a comprehensive troubleshooting guide for a specificinstallation. It shows only possible solutions for testing processes.No customer specific data is given.
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
04000 The local log filereaches a size of{0}. Please make abackup on anexternal drive andclear the log.
normal Relevant only for embedded DB(H2, Derby). See error message.Clear log functionality is availableon 'Backup > Backup log file' onlyfor embedded DB.
Not testable on thestandard productiondatabases (MS SQL,Oracle).
04001 Error occurredwhile trying tobackup log file({0}).
normal The backup destination could notbe written. Check the path and theavailable size!
Choose as backup drivea removable medium andremove it before pressingthe backup button.
05300 ERP XVIEW Modeimport failed.
error XVIEW mode is the PLM / PSMfunctionality for order import. It isrelevant only with active systemsetting "EM01 ERP ERP XVIEWMode". The import task starts onentering the panel "Start order".The error occurs in case of anydatabase connection/networkproblem.Restart PLM. If successfullystarted, enter "Start order" panelagain.
Not testable since theexecution of the task doesnot take long. It is veryhard to perform thedatabase disconnect inthis interval.
05307 External order: {0}has been importedto line: {1}.
info It is not an issue but a confir-mation of successful import. Thenumber is given there by mistake,will be corrected.An external order is created withan external system and importedto the PCE database on activesetting "EM01 ERP ERP XVIEWMode".
-
250 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
05319 Operation notavailable in localcache mode
error The following operations are notavailable in LC mode: editing ofusers, user groups, user rights,AIs, devices, line formats,products, add / remove / edit /move / reset of order, switchingthe line.
Start an order in LCmode. Try to edit a usergroup.
05320 Can't copyproduction order tolocal cachedatabase.
error An unexpected error (for example,database is not reachable) thatoccurs on copying order data fromthe master line to the slave line.Check DB connectivity. Reset theorder on the master line, restartthe line, and start the order on themaster line again.
Not testable since theexecution of the task doesnot take long. It is veryhard to perform thedatabase disconnect inthis interval.
05326 Cannot read PLCdata ({0}) onaddress: {1}.Device: {2}
critical Relevant only for PLC typeRockwell_PLC. Occurs on readingfrom / writing to PLC address.Cause: address is incorrectlyconfigured in Parameter-,Messages-, Teach- or Counters-tables in device settings.Check if the PLC address iscorrectly written and consistentwith addresses supported by PLCsoftware.
Configure a device'Rockwell_PLC' in PLM.Open the device settingsof the PLC, parameterstable. Edit any frequentlyused address likeHeartbeat in order tomake that invalid. RestartPLM.
05500 No product chosen normal Select product in list. In 'Product Management'add a product and savewithout entering a name.
05501 No order chosen normal Select order in list. In 'Order Management'add an order and savewithout entering a name.
05503 No line formatchosen
error No line format is selected whencreating a new order. Select a lineformat before saving.
Go to production->add/edit order. Click add.Type a name for the neworder then click on save.
05504 No device formatfound in device:{0}
error Device format fields cannot beloaded. This currently occurs onlywith AveryPEM devices. Thedevice operates with an FTPconnection.
Disrupt the FTPconnection by shuttingdown the FTP site orunplugging the networkcable for example.
05505 Line format {0}incomplete
normal Check line format. Start workorder/testrunwith an incompletelineformat. A lineformat isonly complete when thereis a format selected foreach active device.
05506 Cannot set deviceformat for device{0}
normal Check connection to device. Only occurs when devicestate is unstable.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 251 / 274
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
05509 Devices not ready.Production startaborted.
error The error is general and appearson production start in case if thedevice state is incorrect for startingthe production. The message isfollowed by another detailed error.For example, if the printer has anynon-confirmed error or the labelupload on the printer is failed bytimeout. How to fix: Check devicefunctionality. For example, devicewas powered off or the cover isopen. Or printer ribbon is torn orused up.
Disconnect ethernet cableto MSC.
05512 Device is linked to{0} configu-ration(s)
normal Before deleting a device it must bedeactivated in all line formats.
Try to delete a deviceused in any line format.
05600 Serial Number: {0}not found indatabase
error This is a technical failsafe errorthat is triggered when thedatabase returns an error or isdisconnected when PLM tries touse a serial number from the listin the database for production.
It is only triggered when atechnical error such as aconnection failure or acorrupt database statusoccurs.
05602 Unknown serial no.({0}) in Code
warning A reader (scanner/camera)encounters an unexpected serialnumber. For example, a serialnumber not designated for therunning order.
1. Set global scanner toSERIAL_LINK_READERreader mode. 2. Startserialization order. 3. Useglobal hand scanner toread an arbitrary codewith serial number.
05622 Cannot aggregateSN: {0}. Thenumber of casesread by {1}exceeds the limitof {2} cases.
error Unexpected error in case of aggre-gation. Repeat aggregation.Occurs when:1. ABS update size mismatch:number of serials to aggregate isunexpected (too high or too low)2. Update size mismatch: numberof serials to aggregate isunexpected (too high or too low)3. Connectivity issues withdatabase4. Permission/lock issues withdatabase (e.g. simultaneousaccess to DB by various PLMs orother applications (on tabletbl_ordersunits)5. Check aggregation list failed(invalid product data)6. Serial for aggregation is invalid(or empty)7. Error while generating helpercode or serial number.
Test depends on theoccurrence. Example:Start a production. Go tothe global scanner >show aggregation. Selecta rank, 3 for example.Click aggregate and scanan invalid code. Thenclose the rank (click onclose).
05640 Cannot aggregateserials on rank: {0}
- The message is not used and willbe removed.
-
252 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
05643 Cannot move nonorphan {0} SN: {1}with parent
normal The scanned unit cannot bemoved to the current orderbecause it is aggregated.Only non-aggregated units can bemoved to the other order.
Open a hierarchy view ofthe global scanner onrunning production. Scana unit that belongs toanother order and isalready aggregated (Forexample, product that isaggregated to case).Observe the errormessage. If the unit is notaggregated, confirmationdialog with a suggestionto move the unit appears.
05644 Cannot insertreceived serial: {0}for order: {1} readby device: {2}
critical Relevant for readers with activatedsetting 'readOnly'. It means thatthe external units read by thedevice are added to the currentorder if they don't exist already.The message is shown on anyunexpected error caused by adatabase communicationproblem.Check the communication with thedatabase. Restart PLM.
Not testable since theexecution of the task doesnot take long. It is veryhard to perform thedatabase disconnect inthis interval.
05652 Order {0} changedby another line.
error A user has changed the selectedorder on another line.
Go to production->startproduction via order.Select an order. Deletethat order on another line.Try to start the productionon the first line.
05655 Cannot moveserial: {0} fromorder: {1} withstatus: {2}
normal The message occurs on aggre-gation close or on scanning theunit with the Global scanner andthe attempt to move the unit fromanother PCE order to the currentorder. The external unit isvalidated. The move is possible ifthe following AIs of external andcurrent order are the same: Lot(10), Expiry Date (17),Production date (11), and Bestbefore (15). The error occurs if thelisted AIs are different.Use only the units from the ordersthat are compatible with thecurrent order.
Open the hierarchy viewof the global scanner ona running production.Scan a unit that belongsto another order that hasa different expiry date..
05701 POWER FAIL, willshutdown in 15seconds...
normal UPS signaled a power fail. Switch off the power.
05800 Insufficient serialsavailable for GTIN:{0} on rank: {1}and serial lengthof: {2}.
error No serial numbers with the definedlength for this rank in thedatabase.
Create a serializationorder with SN algorithmPCLIST and any randomGTIN that has noassigned serial number.Try to start the order.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 253 / 274
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
05814 Insufficient serialsavailable forPRODUCT CODE:{0} on rank: {1}and serial lengthof: {2}.
error Not enough serial numbersavailable for the selected serialnumber algorithm. Import moreserial numbers for the order.
Create an order withserial algorithm(R01)PCLIST. Use or remove allavailable serial numbersin the database. Start aproduction with thatorder.
07001 Databaseconnection lost to:{0} Try toreconnect?
error Database connection is disrupted. Go to the login screen.Disrupt the databaseconnection (e.g. shutdown the databaseservice). Enter validusername and password.
21031 PLC {0}.Unexpectedproduct on out feedconveyor.
critical Countercheck sensor detected anunexpected product. Remove theproduct on the counterchecksensor!
When running inproduction mode, covercounter check sensor for2 seconds.
21032 PLC {0}. Ejectionfailed.
critical Function only applicable whenmachine has counter check badway. Check ejection functionality(air pressure). If using a S7 200there might be a PPI cableplugged – unplug!
When running inproduction mode, covernozzles on bad productpassing.
21034 PLC {0}. Printererror
error Only active when ink level controlis activated.
Remove the cartridge.
21035 PLC {0}. Camera 1not ready foroperation.
normal Check state of camera on port 1.Camera has to be started withproduction.
Press button 'Menu' incamera window duringoperation.
21039 PLC {0}. Camera 5not ready foroperation.
error The error comes from the PLC(single address for all PLC errormessages). A device (not onlycamera) was deactivated in thePLC but the error messages forthis device are still running in thePLC. Deactivate the errormessages.
Switch off the connectionbetween the camera andthe PLC.
21045 PLC {0}. Encodererror
normal Check encoder functionality. Disconnect the data cableat the encoder and startproduction.
21046 PLC {0}. Camera 1consecutive error
Critical Something is wrong with the printquality or imprint is missing. /depends on reason for badreading.
Run a number of badproducts which exceedsthe tolerance set forconsecutive error.
21055 PLC {0}. Low airpressure.
normal Check ejection functionality (airpressure).
Close the manual valve atthe air pressure unitduring operation.
21056 PLC {0}.Emergency stop.
normal Check emergency hardwarebutton.
Press emergency stopbutton during operation.
21057 PLC {0}. Machineselected in bypass.
critical DMS works in dummy/transportmode. Check safety circuit. Checkmotor address. Check motor fordefects.
Turn key switch to runmachine in bypassmode.
254 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
21058 PLC {0}. Productsensor has beencoveredconstantly..
Critical Product (or something else)covers photo eye at infeedconveyor, when production isstarting / remove everything frominfeed conveyor.
Cover the sensor whilethe system is booting.The sensor must becovered before it isrecognized and integratedinto the system.
21062 PLC {0}. Printererror.
error The error comes from the PLC(single address for all PLC errormessages). Check if printer isready and activated in systemsettings. System settings have tobe the same as in lineformat. If theprinter uses LAN, no printer PLCname is allowed in the devicesettings.
Switch off the connectionbetween the printer andthe PLC.
21063 PLC {0}. Error:Long productdetected. Removeall products fromconveyor.
Critical Actual product is longer than thepredefined product length in theline format / enter correct value forproduct length in the line format.
Run products which arelonger than the onestored in the line format +tolerance.
21064 PLC {0}. Error:Short productdetected. Removeall products fromconveyor.
Critical Actual product is longer than thepredefined product length in theline format / enter correct value forproduct length in the line format.
Run products which areshorter than the onestored in the line format +tolerance.
21066 PLC {0}.Downstreammachine stopped.
normal Check downstream hardwarefunctionality.
Operate the input 1.5 forDownstream simulation.
21081 PLC {0}. Error:Open cover.
error Opened door or cover causes theerror. Close door or cover.
Open the door or cover ofthe machine.
21082 PLC {0}. Eject full Critical Too many products were ejected.Bin is full.
Cover the eject bin filllevel sensor.
21083 PLC {0}. Camera 1wrong code
critical Camera 1 no match. Create a different 2D codeand place in front of thecamera while production.
21089 PLC {0}. HeartbeatPLM - connectionbroken from PLC
normal Check PLC - PLM connection. - Start an order- Unplug PPI-cable fromPLC- Wait until PLC stops thebeltTo restart machine- Shut down PLM- Reconnect PPI-cable- Restart PLM
21090 PLC {0}. Missingproduct on ejectsensor
critical Good product on eject sensor ismissing.
Eject a good product tothe ejection box whileproduction. Check forgood path countercheck.
21091 PLC {0}. Upstreammachine stopped
critical Check upstream hardwarefunctionality.
Stop upstream machine.Operate the input 1.4. forUpstream simulation.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 255 / 274
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
21092 PLC {0}.Consecutive Error
Critical Machine consecutive error, sumover all consecutive errors. Onlydiffers from 21046 if severalcameras are used.
Run a number of cartonswhich result in a badresult at all cameraswhich exceeds thetolerance set for machineconsecutive error.
21097 PLC {0}. Timeout:PLC waiting fordata valid fromPLM.
error The error comes from the PLC(single address for all PLC errormessages). Check if on all ranksthe aggregation printer isconfigured correctly.
Unexpected error thatcannot be tested.
21117 PLC {0}. Camera1: Data valid signalmissing.
error Camera is over clocked or datavalid cable from camera is notconnected to PLC.
Disconnect the data validcable.
21118 -21122
PLC {0}. Camera2-6: Data validsignal missing.
error The error comes from the PLC(single address for all PLC errormessages). Check connectingcable. Check PLC and camerasignal. Check if PLC is configuredcorrectly.
Unexpected error thatcannot be tested.
21150 PLC {0}.Countercheck in badway
error Product is not recognized bycounter check bad way after it wasrejected. Check why product is notejected correctly.
Remove bad product byhand before it is rejected.
21195 PLC {0}. Reject binfull
warning Eject fill level sensor blocked.Remove everything betweensensor and reflector.
Block sensor by hand.
21369 PLC {0}. Camera 1good signalmistimed
error Camera 1 sent a good signal tothe PLC without being triggered bythe PLC. Check why cameraprovides mistimed signal.
Make sure that camerareads good and presstrigger button at the backside of the camera.
21371 PLC {0}. Camera 1data valid signalmistimed
error Camera 1 sent a data valid signalto the PLC without being triggeredby the PLC. Check why cameraprovides mistimed signal.
Press trigger button at theback side of the camera.
21423 Consecutive errorsensor 2
error Currently not implemented. -
21440 Warning: TE1(2P1)
warning TE1 provides warning signal forany reason. Check display of TE1to get more information.
Manipulate sensor forlabel material.
21441 Warning: TE2(3P1)
warning TE2 provides Warning signal forany reason. Check display of TE2to get more information.
Manipulate sensor forlabel material.
21442 Warning: Low inklevel Printer 1
warning Printer 1 is running out of ink. Putin new ink cartridges.
Put in empty printcartridge. Alternativelyprovide 24V at input I5.2.
22004 Printer: {0} startprint engine failed
error Unsaved changes in lineformat.Label is not available in printeranymore and lineformat cannotload label. Printer has hardwaredefect (encoder error, no inkcartridge).
Unexpected error thatcannot be tested.
22008 Printer: {0} sendfield data to label:{1} failed
error Formats and fields are not loadedin lineformat. Label is missing inthe lineformat.
Unexpected error thatcannot be tested.
256 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
22102 Print head 1 beltspeed too high.
Warning Wolke "Belt speed" setting has tomatch the actual one. Increasethis setting or lower your beltspeed.
Increase the belt speed tothe maximum. If the errordoes not appear addadditional lines to beprinted.
23000 Could not sendreference code
error Sending a reference code tocamera for verification has failed.Unexpected error that occurs if thecamera provides a negativeresponse on sending a referencecode. Check IP and/or USB connectivityto camera.
Not testable asconnection loss andreference code messagemust occur in a extremelyshort time period.
23001 Error by camera{0} during userinitialization.
error Insufficient rights for camerausage. Set rights (camera A-K inuser management).
Delete the user rights forthe respective camera.
23003 Could not sendreference code todevice {0}.Characters aremissing {1}. Doyou want to startTESTRUN for teachin chars?
normal Error by the specified camera dueto characters not taught in.
Define a reference for acamera OCV window,with characters not in theset of this window. Defineand start an order overthis format.
29000 Cannot write PLCdata ({0}) onaddress: {1}.Device: {2}
error The error is caused by a wrongaddress in the PLC parametersettings. Go to the device settingsof the PLC (button 'Parameters')and check in the parameters tableif the address is correct.
- Go to the device settingsof the PLC (button'Parameters').- Change the address ofthe parameter 'Systemready'. - Save. - Restart PLM. Do not forget to set thevalue back to the correctvalue, save and restartPLM.
29001 Cannot read PLCdata ({0}) onaddress: {1}.Device: {2}
normal Check the OPC address the devicesettings. Check if correct XML-filefor PLC is available in folder"distribution" for all ranks.
Change PLC"ERROR" (Edit devicesettings > PLC >Messages) fromDB1.DBD4800 toDB1.DBD480000000000).
29002 Cannot connectdevice {0} on {1}
normal Check if the device is switched onand physically connected to themachine. Check networkconnector.
Shut down PLM.Disconnect cable atdevice.
29005 Lost connection todevice ''{0} ({1})''
normal Check device connection. Remove network cablefrom device.
29121 Lost connection todevice ''{0} ({1})''
error The PLM direct xml exportdirectory does not exist. Create afolder and set the correct path.
Create a device with thedriver PCE_DIRECT_XML.In the settings for thisnew device, set an invalidpath for the settingexportPath. Try to savethe settings.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 257 / 274
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
29122 XML importdirectory: {0} notavailable
error The PLM direct xml importdirectory does not exist. Create afolder and set the correct path.
create a device with driverPCE_DIRECT_XML. In thesettings for this newdevice, set an invalidpath for the settingimportPath. Try to savethe settings.
33001 MPC: {0} reads {1}unique codes andexceeds expectedtarget size of {2}.
error Devices: PCE_SCM, PCE_HRC,PCE_HRC_LAN, CIV_VDMA. Erroroccurs if the camera is in aggre-gation, reads several items(children) and the amount ofchildren exceeds the amount ofchild items defined for the rank (AI30 /37 ). MPI: in HRC softwareunder "Tolerances/ Processing"the parameter "Reset the lastImage automatically on badresult" is not set to 1.
In the HRC software thereis a setting that definesthe maximum items in alayer to be read. Thisvalue should be morethan AI 30 for this rank inthe PLM order. The erroroccurs after the first read.
36102 Device: {0}selected slave line:{1} does not exist
error Slave device is configured andconnected, but the line on theslave given in the slave devicesettings does not exist on theslave machine. Set the setting to avalid line name.
Create slave device onmaster, set slave line torandom value.
36103 Device: {0} noslave line nameavailable
error Slave device is configured andconnected, but the slave linename is not specified in the devicesettings. Set the setting to a validline name.
Create slave device onmaster, set slave line toempty value.
40030 PLC: Device{0} setstate to: {1} failed
error PLC cannot be set to execute stateupon production start.
Set up the PLC to delayproduction start for atleast 5 seconds.For example: suspend theproduction and do notremove the bad label.
1:1 Not enabled N/A The “release” input is not active.If the release should not be used,this input must be permanently setat 24V.
Deactivate release.Pull out the cable if theinput is not used.
1:2 Emergency stop N/A The "emergency stop" input isactive.The input is executed in a non-wire-break manner, i.e. 0V isrecognized as an active input.The input has only a messagefunction. Safety-related functionsmay not be controlled with this.If the message should not beused, this input must be perma-nently set at 24V.
Press emergency stop.Pull out the cable if theinput is not used.
258 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
1:3 Cover / door open N/A The “door open” input is active.The input is executed in a non-wire-break manner, i.e. 0V isrecognized as an active input.The input has only a messagefunction. Safety-related functionsmay not be controlled with this.If the message should not beused, this input must be perma-nently set at 24V.
Open door.Pull out the cable if theinput is not used.
1:4 Product too long N/A A product length and a tolerancefor the product length is defined inthe format.The product length is measuredwith a product sensor whenstarted up.The measurement exceeds thedefined value.
Start production, and feedin a too-small product.The alarm cannot betested if a machine isconfigured without aconveyor belt.
1:5 Product too short N/A A product length and a tolerancefor the product length is defined inthe format.The product length is measuredwith a product sensor whenstarted up.The measurement is under thedefined value.
Start production, and feedin a too-long product.The alarm cannot betested if a machine isconfigured without aconveyor belt.
1:6 Air pressure toolow
N/A The “air pressure OK” input is notactive.An air pressure sensor can beconnected to this input.The ejector, for example, does notfunction without air pressure.If the air pressure sensor is not tobe used, this input must bepermanently connected to 24V.
Set the air pressure underthe triggering threshold ofthe air pressure monitor.Pull out the cable if theinput is not used.
1:7 Machine notempty
N/A When starting production, partswithin the machine arerecognized.Only the product sensor and theejection counter-check are usedfor recognition. This alarm is sounded if one ofthese sensors does not detect apart at start of production or afterthe end of cleaning. The alarm can be switched offwith a parameter.
Cover the product sensorand/or the counter-monitoring ejection orplace a product in front ofthe sensor before startingproduction.The alarm cannot betested if a machine isconfigured without aconveyor belt.
1:8 Upstreamequipment notready
N/A The “previous machine” input isnot active.If the ready-to-start message is notused, this input must be perma-nently set at 24V.
Do not activate theprevious machine.Pull out the cable if theinput is not used.
1:9 Downstreamequipment notready
N/A The “downstream machine” inputis not active.If the ready-to-start message is notused, this input must be perma-nently set at 24V.
Do not activate thedownstream machine.Pull out the cable if theinput is not used.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 259 / 274
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
1:10 Unexpected item atcountercheck goodway
N/A During production, a part wasdiscovered at an unexpected pointin time in the ejection counter-check.
Insert a product after theproduct sensor or thesensor for the ejectioncounter-monitoringbetween two productsduring production.The alarm cannot betested if a machine isconfigured without aconveyor belt or anejection counter-check.
1:11 Jam atdownstreamequipment
N/A The product length is measuredwith a jam sensor at thedischarge.The measurement exceeds thevalue plus a 25% tolerance.The input is not yet implemented.The alarm is an extension forfuture versions.
This alarm is not yetimplemented, and cannotbe tested.
1:12 Jam at upstreamequipment
N/A The product length is measuredwith a jam sensor at the entry.The measurement exceeds thevalue plus a 25% tolerance.The input is not yet implemented.The alarm is an extension forfuture versions.
This alarm is not yetimplemented, and cannotbe tested.
1:13 Bypass N/A The “bypass” input is activeThe input is not yet implemented.The alarm is an extension forfuture versions.
This alarm is not yetimplemented, and cannotbe tested.
1:15 Teach mode N/A Various lengths can be automat-ically learned by the system on theconfiguration sides.The conveyor belt is controlled forthis. Thus parts can be conveyedto the discharge. Untested partscan reach the ‘good’ channel.Thus this mode is entered as analarm.
Activate the teach mode.
1:16 Diagnostic mode N/A Outlets can be directly switched onthe diagnostic sides.The system can therefore assumeunforeseen conditions. Untestedparts can reach the ‘good’channel.Thus this mode is entered as analarm.
Activate the diagnosticmode.
1:17 Missing item atcountercheck goodway
N/A During production, a part wasexpected in the ejection counter-check.But no part was recognized.
During production, agood product was ejectedbefore the ejectioncounter-check.The alarm cannot betested if a machine isconfigured without aconveyor belt or anejection counter-check.
260 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
1:18 Language notsupported
N/A The IM requires a language whichis not supported.It uses the languages stored in theparameters.
Switch to a language inthe IM/PLM which is notsupported by the PLC.
1:19 {LoginName}logged in withlevel {LoginLevel}
N/A The user {LoginName} logged inas {LoginLevel} (Operator,Setup…).
Notify the user if there isan inactive IM/PLM.
1:20 {LogoutName}logged out
N/A The user {LoginName} has loggedin.
Log off the user if there isan inactive IM/PLM.
1:21 rotary encoder forthe distancemeasurement outof order
N/A The rotary encoder for the distancemeasurement provides no pulse,despite the fact that the conveyoris running.The alarm is first actively switchedon if a product has passed theproduct sensor. If the conveyor isdelayed, there is no alarm whenthe machine is started.The rotary encoder is faulty.The wire to the rotary encoder isdefective.The idler is not connected to theconveyor.The attachment of the idler to therotary encoder is not correct.
If in active production,loosen the wire from therotary encoder, or loosenthe mechanicalconnection between therotary encoder and thetransport conveyor.The alarm cannot betested if a machine isconfigured without aconveyor belt.
1:22 rotary encoder forthe distancemeasurementwrong direction
N/A The rotary encoder for the distancemeasurement goes in a negativerotary direction.The rotary encoder is incorrectlyinstalled.A and B tracks are reversed.The conveyor is moving the wrongway.
The rotary encoder isincorrectly installed.
1:23 command notallowed
N/A The desired command (such asstart) is not allowed at this time,because the reported user doesnot have the needed rights.
Log in a user without theneeded rights, and pressthe start button.The alarm cannot betested if the system iscompletely controlled withthe PLM (withoutmechanical buttons). ThePLM only presents thebuttons that the user canpress.
1:99 Configuration: testalarm
N/A The test alarm for this alarm groupwas activated from the diagnosticside.
Activate the test alarm.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 261 / 274
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
31-42:0 Printer Not Ready N/A The ready signal from this deviceis not active.The parameters set how long adevice needs in order to report itsreadiness.If the device is now activated in aline format, it has this time toactivate the ready signal.This alarm is triggered if the readysignal is not active.If the ready signal was activebefore, the alarm is sounded assoon as the signal becomesinactive, even for a short time.
Deactivate if the signal isactively reproduced, suchas by interrupting therelevant connection.
31-42:1 {DeviceName}:noData Valid
N/A After the device has beentriggered, a specific time is neededto calculate the result.After that, it must report the “datavalid” signal, indicating that thecalculation has been done and thedata are available.This alarm sounds if the messageis not given within the defined timeperiod.
Deactivate if the signal isactively reproduced, suchas by interrupting therelevant connection.
31-42:2 {DeviceName}:Data Good too long
N/A The “data valid” and “data good”signals may not exceed aspecified period of time.No manipulations or electricalfaults can therefore be detected.The maximum allowable signallength is calculated from the“normal” signal length of a device.This signal length is found in thedevice’s data sheet, and is enteredin the parameters.The maximum length is ten timesthe signal length.
Activate the signal perma-nently.To do this, one can, forexample, replace thesignal wire with a 24Vwire.There are devices whichuse this input for otherfunctions. The alarmcannot be tested if it isnoted in this devicedescription that the inputis not monitored forexceeding time.
31-42:3 {DeviceName}:Data Valid too long
N/A The “data valid” and “data good”signals may not exceed aspecified period of time.No manipulations or electricalfaults can therefore be detected.The maximum allowable signallength is calculated from the“normal” signal length of a device.This signal length is found in thedevice’s data sheet, and is enteredin the parameters.The maximum length is ten timesthe signal length.
Activate the signal perma-nently.To do this, one can, forexample, replace thesignal wire with a 24Vwire.There are devices whichuse this input for otherfunctions. The alarmcannot be tested if it isnoted in this devicedescription that the inputis not monitored forexceeding time.
262 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
31-42:4 {DeviceName}:consecutive error
N/A This alarm is activated if thedevice delivers a bad readingseveral times in a row.The number of bad readings is setin the parameters.The bad reading counter is resetwith every good reading. Such as:The number of allowed badreadings is 10. A good reading isdone after 9 bad readings. Themeter for the consecutive errorsbegins again at 1 with the nextbad reading.
Deliver more than theconfigured number of badproducts to the device.
31-42:5 {DeviceName}:unexpected trigger
N/A The device must deliver a resultafter a trigger.This requires a certain amount oftime.This alarm is displayed if a deviceis triggered again, even before theresult has been delivered.
Trigger for an unexpectedcondition.To do this, one can, forexample, replace thesignal wire with a 24Vwire.
31-42:6 {DeviceName}:unexpected status
N/A Reserved for the future. This cannot be tested.
31-42:7 {DeviceName}:noData Good
N/A There are devices which mustproduce positive feedback aftereach trigger.For reasons of modularity, thisfeedback is connected to the “datagood” signal.This alarm sounds if the feedbackis not given within the defined timeperiod.Example of such a device:Ejection with ejection check.
Deactivate if the signal isactively reproduced, suchas by interrupting therelevant connection.
31-42:8 {DeviceName01}bad
N/A The device has recognized a badpart.One can configure whether thedevice sounds an alarm.This alarm can be used, forexample, for individual stepcontrols with a confirmation.
Configure the alarm andput a bad part into thedevice.
31-42:9 {DeviceName}good
N/A The device has recognized a goodpart.One can configure whether thedevice sounds an alarm.This alarm can be used, forexample, for individual stepcontrols with a confirmation.
Configure the alarm andput a good part into thedevice.
31-42:10 {DeviceName} N/A Special alarmEvery device can trigger a specialalarm, which is displayed, forexample, for a specific operatingstatus.This alarm is described for eachdevice type.The alarm text must be formedwith additional text.
This cannot be indepen-dently tested.The test must be donewith a specifiedsequence.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 263 / 274
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
31-42:11 {DeviceName}: noconfirmation
N/A The device did not react to controlcommands.
This cannot be tested.
31-42:12 {DeviceName}: Noheartbeat
N/A This alarm is only valid if thedevice is connected to the PLC viaOPC-UA.The monitoring signal of thedevice has to change its conditionbetween active and inactive withina preset time. If there is no changein condition within the preset time,the system sounds this alarm. The monitoring only takes place ifthe "system ready" signal hasadditionally been set by thedevice. This prevents that thesystem sounds the alarm due todifferent time behavior whenstarting up or shutting down.
Interrupt the communi-cation to the device.
88:0 SCS focus: configu-ration cannot betransferred
N/A The motor configuration could notbe transferred to the controlmodule.
This cannot be tested.
88:99 SCS: test alarm N/A The test alarm for this alarm groupwas activated from the diagnosticside.
Activate the test alarm.
89:0 No heartbeat N/A The IM monitoring signal mustconstantly change its statusbetween active and inactive withina set time.This alarm is triggered if nochange is recognized within theset time.The monitoring only takes place ifthe PLM/IM has additionally setthe “PLM ready” signal.This prevents that the systemsounds this alarm due to differenttime behavior of the PLC and theIM when starting up or shuttingdown.
Interrupt the communi-cation between the IM/PLM.Then an error occurs, butthis cannot be displayed,as the IM/PLM also takeover presentation ofalarms. The alarm is onlydisplayed, therefore, aftercommunication isrestored.
89:1 PLM not ready N/A The PLM does not send the"system ready" signal.
This cannot be tested.
89:99 Communication:test alarm
N/A The test alarm for this alarm groupwas activated from the diagnosticside.
Activate the test alarm.
90:99 PackML: test alarm N/A The test alarm for this alarm groupwas activated from the diagnosticside.
Activate the test alarm.
91:0-99 Test {Number} N/A The test alarm for this alarm groupwas activated from the diagnosticside.
Activate the test alarm.
92:0 N/A
92:1 {DeviceName01}bad
N/A Reaction to a bad reading.This alarm is displayed
94:0 Can't read donglestatus
N/A A dongle is recognized, but cannotbe correctly read.
This cannot be tested.
264 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
94:1 Can't readlicenses
N/A A dongle is recognized, but itcannot read licenses.
This cannot be tested.
94:3 Can't read licensedata
N/A A dongle with licenses isrecognized, but the contentscannot be read.
This cannot be tested.
94:4 Can't clear dongle N/A If a technician resets a dongle, hemust first erase the old data.Could not erase the data.
This cannot be tested.
94:5 Can't write dongle N/A The new technical dongle cannotbe overwritten with the data.
This cannot be tested.
94:6 dongle from{Name} plugged in
N/A The technician {Name} wasregistered with his dongle.This alarm is only used to recordthe alarm history if there havebeen changes to the PLC.
This cannot be tested.
94:7 dongle from{Name} removed
N/A The technician {Name} removedhis dongle.This alarm is only used to recordthe alarm history if there havebeen changes to the PLC.
Remove the dongle
94:8 this function isdisabled for{Name}
N/A The dongle is not the only accessmeans to change configurations.In addition to the dongle, the usermust be logged in with the correctrights.This alarm is displayed if therights of the logged in user are notcorrect.
Log in an incorrect userand plug in the dongle
94:99 Technician dongle:test alarm
N/A The test alarm for this alarm groupwas activated from the diagnosticside.
Activate the test alarm
95:0 Configuration savefailed
N/A The configuration could not besaved.If the PLC is restarted, anypossible changes have been lost.
This cannot be tested.
95:1 Configuration loadfailed
N/A The configuration could not beloaded.Since the configuration is alwaysloaded from a specified file, thisfile is possibly not available, or isdefective.
This cannot be tested.
95:2 Parameter savefailed
N/A The parameters could not besaved.If the PLC is restarted, anypossible changes have been lost.
This cannot be tested.
95:3 Parameter loadfailed
N/A The parameters could not beloaded.The file is possibly not available ordefective.
This cannot be tested.
95:4 Information savefailed
N/A The file with the hardware infor-mation could not be saved.
This cannot be tested.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 265 / 274
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
95:5 Information loadfailed
N/A The file with the hardware infor-mation could not be loaded.This alarm is only presentbecause all file alarms arehandled in the same way.The file with the hardware infor-mation will never be loaded.Therefore, this alarm will neversound.
This cannot be tested.
95:6 Data save failed N/A The file with the format could notbe saved.If the PLC is restarted, anypossible changes have been lost.
This cannot be tested.
95:7 Data load failed N/A The file with the format could notbe saved.The file is possibly not available ordefective.
This cannot be tested.
95:10 Configuration copyfailed
N/A A back-up copy of the old file iscreated before saving a configu-ration.An error occurred in this step.This has no influence on the newfile
This cannot be tested.
95:15 Error data save /load / create
N/A Internal PLC program error.Not used for diagnosis purposes
This cannot be tested.
95:16 Error configurationsave / load /create
N/A Internal PLC program error.Not used for diagnosis purposes
This cannot be tested.
95:17 Export failed N/A An error occurred when exportingthe files to a USB stick.
This cannot be tested.
95:18 Can't read cameradata
N/A Reserved for the future. This cannot be tested.
95:20 default parameterfaulty
N/A The standard parameters arefaulty. This alarm occurs if a randomparameter file is renamed in orderto create standard parameters.Standard parameters have adifferent coding than randomparameters and can only becreated by members of theproduction team.
This cannot be tested.
95:99 Configuration: testalarm
N/A The test alarm for this alarm groupwas activated from the diagnosticside.
Activate the test alarm
96:0 Internal error"CreateInfo"
N/A Internal PLC program error.Only used for diagnosis purposes.
This cannot be tested.
96:1 Internal error"DisposeInfo"
N/A Internal PLC program error.Only used for diagnosis purposes.
This cannot be tested.
96:2 Erreur interne"GetNumInfo"
N/A Internal PLC program error.Only used for diagnosis purposes.
This cannot be tested.
96:3 Internal error"GetStrInfo"
N/A Internal PLC program error.Only used for diagnosis purposes.
This cannot be tested.
266 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
96:4 Internal error"structure size"
N/A Internal PLC program error.Only used for diagnosis purposes.
This cannot be tested.
96:5 Unable todetermine softwareversion
N/A Internal PLC program error.Only used for diagnosis purposes.
This cannot be tested.
96:6 Node {WrongMod-ulNode}, Slot{WrongModulSlot},wrong module.Expected: {Wrong-ModulExpected},plugged: {Wrong-ModulName}
N/A When electrically switching on thePLC, a one-time check isperformed in order to verifywhether the physically availablemodule agrees with the configuredmodules.If an incorrect module is found,every additional check is inter-rupted, and this error is displayed.For easier debugging, it showswhich module is configured andwhich module has been foundinstead. The task is done in plaintext.Example: Node 0, socket 16,incorrect module. Expected:X20DI9371 , plugged:X20DO9322
Electrically switch off thePLC and plug in thewrong module.Then switch on the PLC.
96:7 Can't read IPaddress
N/A The IP address of the PLC cannotbe read from the internal memoryarea.Not used for diagnosis purposes
This cannot be tested.
96:8 IP address cannotbe set
N/A The new IP address which hasbeen entered in the configurationcannot be saved in the PLC’sinternal memory.Not used for diagnosis purposes.
This cannot be tested.
96:9 Unable to set timeserver
N/A The time server which has beenentered in the configuration cannotbe saved in the PLC’s internalmemory.Not used for diagnosis purposes.
This cannot be tested.
96:10 Battery empty N/A The memory area is supplied by abattery for specific PLC hardware.Thus the contents remain storedwhen the voltage is switched off.This alarm is only displayed if thePLC has this functionality.Data storage is done in anotherway with the currently-usedCP1382. The alarm can thereforenot be active with this CPU.
This cannot be tested.The currently-used CPUhas no battery; rather, ituses a special type ofmemory.
96:11 Node{DigOutNode}, slot{DigOutSlot},channel{DigOutChannel}:short circuit oroverload
N/A The digital output module has aninternal load monitor.The alarm is displayed when theload monitor is active.
Produce a short-circuit oroverload.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 267 / 274
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
96:12 Node {IoPwrNode},slot {IoPwrSlot}:power supply fault
N/A The PLC (CPU and components)has 2 separate voltage supplies.The voltage supply for internalelectronics and voltage supply forinputs and outputs.Both voltage supplies areseparately monitored.This alarm is displayed if there isan error in voltage supply forinputs and outputs.
Remove the I/O voltagesupply.
96:13 Node {PwrNode},slot {PwrSlot}:internal powersupply fault
N/A The PLC has 2 separate voltagesupplies.The voltage supply for internalelectronics and voltage supply forinputs and outputs.Both voltage supplies areseparately monitored.This alarm is displayed if there isa fault in internal voltage supply.
This cannot be tested.
96:14 Node{WireAnaNode},slot {WireAnaSlot},channel{WireAnaChannel}:broken wire
N/A The inputs for analog voltages(such as speed information) isrecognized, even though a voltagesource is also connected. Thisalarm is displayed if theconnection to the voltage source isinterrupted.Analog inputs which are not usedmust be short-circuited with abroken wire in order to avoid thisalarm.
Open a wire break.
96:15 Node{ModulNode}, slot{ModuleSlot}: nomodule or moduleout of order
N/A All modules which are needed inthe current configuration aremonitored for faults during runtime.This alarm is displayed if amodule is defective or no longeravailable.
Remove the module in arunning state.
96:16 No connection tonode {NodeNode}
N/A External components areconnected to the CPU over a dataconnection.No data connection can be built tothis component, or the dataconnection was interrupted
Interrupt the dataconnection to the I/Onodes.
96:17 Node{WireDigNode},slot {WireDigSlot},channel{WireDigChannel}:broken wire
N/A Some digital modules have manymonitors to the connectedsensors.A great number of fault statusescan be recognized for specificsensors.This alarm is displayed when aconnection to the sensor has afault.This alarm is only displayed if therelevant input card (X20DI4375)is installed with the relevantsensors.
This cannot be tested.This module has not beenused yet.
268 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
96:18 Node {ShortNode},slot {ShortSlot},channel {Short-Channel}: shortcircuit
N/A Some digital modules have manymonitors to the connectedsensors.A great number of fault statusescan be recognized for specificsensors.This alarm is displayed when aconnection to the sensor has afault.This alarm is only displayed if therelevant input card (X20DI4375)is installed with the relevantsensors.
This cannot be tested.This module has not beenused yet.
96:19 Node {VoltNode},slot {VoltSlot},channel{VoltChannel}:voltage monitoring
N/A Some digital modules have manymonitors to the connectedsensors.A great number of fault statusescan be recognized for specificsensors.This alarm is displayed when aconnection to the sensor has afault.This alarm is only displayed if therelevant input card (X20DI4375)is installed with the relevantsensors.
This cannot be tested.This module has not beenused yet.
96:20 Node {DigInNode},slot {DigInSlot},channel {DigIn-Channel}: fault
N/A Some digital modules have manymonitors to the connectedsensors.A great number of fault statusescan be recognized for specificsensors.This alarm is displayed if anotherfault is present at this input.This alarm is only displayed if therelevant input card (X20DI4375)is installed with the relevantsensors.
This cannot be tested.This module has not beenused yet.
96:21 CPU slotX{XPwrSlot} powersupply fault
N/A The PLC (CPU and components)has 2 separate voltage supplies.The voltage supply for internalelectronics and voltage supply forinputs and outputs.Both voltage supplies areseparately monitored.If there is a fault in internal voltagesupply on the CPU, this can nolonger work.Therefore, only the voltage supplyfor the I/O module is monitored onthe CPU.
Remove the I/O voltagesupply
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 269 / 274
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
96:22 Node{DigOutNode}, slot{DigOutSlot},channel{DigOutChannel}:short circuit oroverload
N/A The "CP1382" CPU has 3 internal,fixed I/O modules.These modules have the samediagnostic function as other I/Omodules.Since these are, however, alldisplayed over the “node 0, socket0”, the messages are subdivided
Produce a short-circuit oroverload.
96:23 Node{WireAnaNode},slot {WireAnaSlot},channel{WireAnaChannel}:broken wire
N/A The "CP1382" CPU has 3 internal,fixed I/O modules.These modules have the samediagnostic function as other I/Omodules.Since these are, however, alldisplayed over the “node 0, socket0”, the messages are subdivided
Open a wire break.
96:24 PLC coldstart,check all values
N/A A cold start is triggered in the PLC.All values in the battery-bufferedmemory are erased.No more formats can be loaded.All values must be checked.The reason for the cold start mustbe determined.
Trigger the cold start ofthe PLC over thediagnostic side.
96:99 Node {TestNode},slot {TestSlot},channel{TestChannel}: testalarm
N/A The test alarm for this alarm groupwas activated from the diagnosticside.
Activate the test alarm.
97:0 - N/A This alarm is not created. Thealarm text is only registered inorder to have a consistentmapping of input number andalarm number. Internally, thecounting of alarms starts at 0 foreach alarm group but the countingof the inputs starts at 1.
-
97:1-98 - N/A Input 1-98. You have the possi-bility to connect signallingcontacts to up to 96 digital inputs.In this alarm group, eachsignalling contact input has adedicated alarm. You create thealarm text yourself in theparameter.
Activate the signal. For example by replacingthe signal cable by a 24Volt cable.
97:99 Customer alarms:test alarm
N/A The test alarm for this alarm groupwas activated from the diagnosticside.
Activate the test alarm.
98:0 Internal error 5 N/A Internal PLC program error.Not used for diagnosis purposes.
This cannot be tested.
270 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
AlarmNumber
Alarm Message AlarmCategory
Probable cause/ How to fix theissue
How to test/ Why nottestable
98:1 Cannot create datamodule, errorcode: {ErrCode}
N/A The copying protection informationis stored internally in the PLC in adata module.This data module must be createdonce for a new PLC.The data module could not becreated.Internal PLC program error.Only used for diagnosis purposes.
This cannot be tested.
98:2 Cannot read datamodule, errorcode: {ErrCode}
N/A The copying protection informationis stored internally in the PLC in adata module.This data module is read when thePLC is started.The data module could not beread.Internal PLC program error.Only used for diagnosis purposes.
This cannot be tested.
98:3 Cannot write datamodule, errorcode: {ErrCode}
N/A The copying protection informationis stored internally in the PLC in adata module.This data module must be createdonce for a new PLC.The data module was created, butcould not be written with data.Internal PLC program error.Only used for diagnosis purposes.
This cannot be tested.
98:4 Check PLC serialnumber
N/A There is no data module with copyprotection information or this infor-mation does not fit this PLC.The correct serial number must beentered within 7 days from the firstoccurrence of the alarm.
This cannot be tested.
98:98 PLC serial numberwrong
N/A No correct serial number wasentered within the 7 day deadline.Production cannot be started.
This cannot be tested.
98:99 Copy protection:test alarm
N/A The test alarm for this alarm groupwas activated from the diagnosticside.
Activate the test alarm.
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 271 / 274
Inten
tiona
lly le
ft blan
k
272 / 274 PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
Pharmacontrol Electronic GmbHGernsheimer Strasse 264673 Zwingenberg, GermanyTel. +49 6251 8545-0Fax +49 6251 8545-111www.mt.com
Subject to technical changes.© Pharmacontrol Electronic GmbH 11/2017PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A
For more informationwww.mt.com/pce
PCE Line Manager - PLM/PLM direct 4.16 - User Manual - Document Version A 11/6/2017 9:52AM - Schema ST4 PDF engine - Layout by Victor Mahler